blob: 24cc3ac8cec556cd0fc54b1ad9c17b4e74104b8e [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau9d4d9e32010-05-13 22:17:08 +02005 version 1.4.5
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreau9d4d9e32010-05-13 22:17:08 +02007 2010/05/13
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100130a smaller value. HAProxy currently only supports the HTTP keep-alive mode on
131the client side, and transforms it to a close mode on the server side.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
145HAProxy supports pipelined requests on the client side and processes them one
146at a time.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200147
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200148
1491.2. HTTP request
150-----------------
151
152First, let's consider this HTTP request :
153
154 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100155 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200156 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
157 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
158 3 User-agent: my small browser
159 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
160 5 Accept: image/png
161
162
1631.2.1. The Request line
164-----------------------
165
166Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
167
168 - a METHOD : GET
169 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
170 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
171
172All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
173which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
174followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
175is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
176desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
177the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
178
179The URI itself can have several forms :
180
181 - A "relative URI" :
182
183 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
184
185 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
186 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
187
188 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
189
190 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
191
192 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
193 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
194 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
195 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
196 must accept this form too.
197
198 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
199 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
200 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200202 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
203 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
204 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
205 other protocols too.
206
207In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
208mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
209on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
210It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
211specific to the language, framework or application in use.
212
213
2141.2.2. The request headers
215--------------------------
216
217The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
218beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
219an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
220Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
221values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
222encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
223the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
224define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
225
226Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
227their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
228"Connection:" header).
229
230The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
231that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
232is one valid form of empty line.
233
234Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
235headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
236about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
237application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
238
239Important note:
240 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
241 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
242 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
243 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
244
245
2461.3. HTTP response
247------------------
248
249An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
250messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
251
252 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100253 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200254 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
255 2 Content-length: 350
256 3 Content-Type: text/html
257
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200258As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
259codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
260response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100261continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
262the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
263following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
264sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
265(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
266correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
267such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
268state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
269over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
270if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
271information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100388
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100402 - tune.rcvbuf.client
403 - tune.rcvbuf.server
404 - tune.sndbuf.client
405 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100406
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200407 * Debugging
408 - debug
409 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200410
411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004123.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413------------------------------------
414
415chroot <jail dir>
416 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
417 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
418 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
419 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
420 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
421 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100422
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200423daemon
424 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
425 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
426 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
427
428gid <number>
429 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
430 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
431 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
432 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100433
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200434group <group name>
435 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
436 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200438log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
440 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100441 configured with "log global".
442
443 <address> can be one of:
444
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100445 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
447 port).
448
449 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
450 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
451 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
452 writeable).
453
454 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200455
456 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
457 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
458 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
459
460 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200461 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
462 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
463 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
464 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
465 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
466 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200467
468 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
469
470nbproc <number>
471 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
472 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
473 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
474 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
475 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
476
477pidfile <pidfile>
478 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
479 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
480 starting the process. See also "daemon".
481
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200482stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200483 [level <level>]
484
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200485 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
486 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100487 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
489
490 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
491 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
492 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
493 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
494 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
495
496 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
497 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
498 counters).
499
500 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
501 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100502
503 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
504 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
505 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
506 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
507 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
508 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
509 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200510
511stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
512 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
513 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100514 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats maxconn <connections>
517 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
518 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
519
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200520uid <number>
521 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
522 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
523 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
524 one. See also "gid" and "user".
525
526ulimit-n <number>
527 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
528 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
529 option.
530
531user <user name>
532 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
533 See also "uid" and "group".
534
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200535node <name>
536 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
537
538 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
539 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
540 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
541 traffic.
542
543description <text>
544 Add a text that describes the instance.
545
546 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
547 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
548 "<" and ">" characters.
549
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200552-----------------------
553
554maxconn <number>
555 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
556 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
557 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
558 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
559
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100560maxpipes <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
562 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
563 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
564 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
565 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
566 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
567
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200568noepoll
569 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
570 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
571 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
572
573nokqueue
574 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
577
578nopoll
579 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
580 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100581 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200582 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
583 "nokqueue".
584
585nosepoll
586 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
587 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
588 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
589
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100590nosplice
591 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
592 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
593 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100594 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
596 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
597 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
598 "option splice-response".
599
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200600spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
601 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
602 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
603 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
604 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
605 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
606
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200607tune.bufsize <number>
608 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
609 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
610 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
611 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
612 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
613 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
614 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
615 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
616
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100617tune.maxaccept <number>
618 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
619 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
620 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100621 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
623 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100624 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100625 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
626
627tune.maxpollevents <number>
628 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
629 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
630 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
631 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
632 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
633
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200634tune.maxrewrite <number>
635 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
636 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
637 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
638 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
639 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
640 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
641 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
642 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
643 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
644 bufsize.
645
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100646tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
647tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
648 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
649 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
650 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
651 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
652 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
653 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
654 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
655
656tune.sndbuf.client <number>
657tune.sndbuf.server <number>
658 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
659 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
660 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
661 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
662 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
663 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
664 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
665 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
666 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
667 notifying haproxy again.
668
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200669
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006703.3. Debugging
671--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200672
673debug
674 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
675 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
676 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
677 system startup.
678
679quiet
680 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
681 line argument "-q".
682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006833.4. Userlists
684--------------
685It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
686http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
687it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
688
689userlist <listname>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100690 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many independent userlists can be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100691 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
692
693group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100694 Adds group <groupname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100695 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
696 proceeded by "users" keyword.
697
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100698user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
699 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100700 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
701 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100702 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so depending of the system's
703 capabilities, different algorithms are supported. For example modern Glibc
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100704 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
705 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
706
707
708 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100709 userlist L1
710 group G1 users tiger,scott
711 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100712
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100713 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
714 user scott insecure-password elgato
715 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100716
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100717 userlist L2
718 group G1
719 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100720
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100721 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
722 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
723 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100724
725 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200726
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007274. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200728----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100729
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
731 - defaults <name>
732 - frontend <name>
733 - backend <name>
734 - listen <name>
735
736A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
737its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
738section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100739section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200740
741A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
742connections.
743
744A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
745to forward incoming connections.
746
747A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
748parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
749
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100750All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
751'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
752case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
753
754Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
755logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
756proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
757However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
758name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
759
760Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
761and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100762bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100763protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
764modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
765arbitrary criteria.
766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100767
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007684.1. Proxy keywords matrix
769--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100770
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200771The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
772limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
773they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
774limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100775marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200776option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200777and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
778with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
779specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100780
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200781
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100782 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
783------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
784acl - X X X
785appsession - - X X
786backlog X X X -
787balance X - X X
788bind - X X -
789bind-process X X X X
790block - X X X
791capture cookie - X X -
792capture request header - X X -
793capture response header - X X -
794clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
795contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
796cookie X - X X
797default-server X - X X
798default_backend X X X -
799description - X X X
800disabled X X X X
801dispatch - - X X
802enabled X X X X
803errorfile X X X X
804errorloc X X X X
805errorloc302 X X X X
806-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
807errorloc303 X X X X
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +0200808force-persist - X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100809fullconn X - X X
810grace X X X X
811hash-type X - X X
812http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
813http-request - X X X
814id - X X X
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +0200815ignore-persist - X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100816log X X X X
817maxconn X X X -
818mode X X X X
819monitor fail - X X -
820monitor-net X X X -
821monitor-uri X X X -
822option abortonclose (*) X - X X
823option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
824option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
825option allbackups (*) X - X X
826option checkcache (*) X - X X
827option clitcpka (*) X X X -
828option contstats (*) X X X -
829option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
830option dontlognull (*) X X X -
831option forceclose (*) X X X X
832-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
833option forwardfor X X X X
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +0200834option http-pretend-keepalive (*) X X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100835option http-server-close (*) X X X X
836option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
837option httpchk X - X X
838option httpclose (*) X X X X
839option httplog X X X X
840option http_proxy (*) X X X X
841option independant-streams (*) X X X X
842option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
843option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
844option logasap (*) X X X -
845option mysql-check X - X X
846option nolinger (*) X X X X
847option originalto X X X X
848option persist (*) X - X X
849option redispatch (*) X - X X
850option smtpchk X - X X
851option socket-stats (*) X X X -
852option splice-auto (*) X X X X
853option splice-request (*) X X X X
854option splice-response (*) X X X X
855option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
856option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
857-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
858option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
859option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
860option tcpka X X X X
861option tcplog X X X X
862option transparent (*) X - X X
863persist rdp-cookie X - X X
864rate-limit sessions X X X -
865redirect - X X X
866redisp (deprecated) X - X X
867redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
868reqadd - X X X
869reqallow - X X X
870reqdel - X X X
871reqdeny - X X X
872reqiallow - X X X
873reqidel - X X X
874reqideny - X X X
875reqipass - X X X
876reqirep - X X X
877reqisetbe - X X X
878reqitarpit - X X X
879reqpass - X X X
880reqrep - X X X
881-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
882reqsetbe - X X X
883reqtarpit - X X X
884retries X - X X
885rspadd - X X X
886rspdel - X X X
887rspdeny - X X X
888rspidel - X X X
889rspideny - X X X
890rspirep - X X X
891rsprep - X X X
892server - - X X
893source X - X X
894srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
895stats auth X - X X
896stats enable X - X X
897stats hide-version X - X X
898stats realm X - X X
899stats refresh X - X X
900stats scope X - X X
901stats show-desc X - X X
902stats show-legends X - X X
903stats show-node X - X X
904stats uri X - X X
905-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
906stick match - - X X
907stick on - - X X
908stick store-request - - X X
909stick-table - - X X
910tcp-request content accept - X X -
911tcp-request content reject - X X -
912tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
913timeout check X - X X
914timeout client X X X -
915timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
916timeout connect X - X X
917timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
918timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
919timeout http-request X X X X
920timeout queue X - X X
921timeout server X - X X
922timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
923timeout tarpit X X X X
924transparent (deprecated) X - X X
925use_backend - X X -
926------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
927 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200928
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100929
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009304.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
931---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100932
933This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
934
935
936acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
937 Declare or complete an access list.
938 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
939 no | yes | yes | yes
940 Example:
941 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
942 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
943 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
944
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200945 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100946
947
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100948appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
949 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100950 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
951 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
952 no | no | yes | yes
953 Arguments :
954 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
955 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
956
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100957 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100958 checked in each cookie value.
959
960 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
961 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
962 milliseconds.
963
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200964 request-learn
965 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
966 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
967 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
968 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
969 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
970 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
971
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100972 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
973 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
974 data following this prefix.
975
976 Example :
977 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
978
979 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
980 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
981
982 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
983 2 modes are currently supported :
984 - path-parameters :
985 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
986 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
987 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
988 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
989 - query-string :
990 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
991 query string.
992
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100993 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
994 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
995 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
996 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100997 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
998 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
999 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001000 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
1001 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
1002
1003 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1004
1005 Example :
1006 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1007
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001008 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick", "stick-table"
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001009 and "ignore-persist"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001010
1011
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001012backlog <conns>
1013 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1014 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1015 yes | yes | yes | no
1016 Arguments :
1017 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1018 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1019 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1020
1021 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1022 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1023 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1024 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1025 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1026 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1027 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1028 backlog parameter.
1029
1030 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1031 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1032 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1033
1034 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1035
1036
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001037balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001038balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001039 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1040 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1041 yes | no | yes | yes
1042 Arguments :
1043 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1044 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1045 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1046 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1047
1048 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1049 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1050 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1051 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001052 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1053 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1054 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1055 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1056 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1057 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1058 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1059 it, so that you don't worry.
1060
1061 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1062 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1063 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1064 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1065 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1066 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1067 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1068 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001069
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001070 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1071 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1072 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1073 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1074 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1075 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1076 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1077 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1078
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001079 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1080 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1081 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1082 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1083 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1084 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1085 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1086 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001087 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001088 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001089 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1090 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1091 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001092
1093 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1094 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1095 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1096 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1097 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1098 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1099 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001100 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1101 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1102 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001103
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001104 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1105 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1106 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1107 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1108 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1109 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1110 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1111 URIs start with a leading "/".
1112
1113 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1114 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1115 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1116 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1117
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001118 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001119 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1120
1121 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1122 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1123 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1124 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1125 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1126 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1127 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1128 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1129 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1130 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1131 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1132 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1133 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1134 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1135 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1136 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1137 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1138 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1139 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1140 be randomly balanced if at all.
1141
1142 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1143 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1144 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1145 server will receive the request.
1146
1147 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1148 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1149 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1150 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1151 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001152 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1153 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1154 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001155
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001156 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1157 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1158 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001159 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001160 algorithm is applied instead.
1161
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001162 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001163 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1164 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1165 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1166
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001167 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1168 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1169 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1170
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001171 rdp-cookie
1172 rdp-cookie(name)
1173 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1174 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1175 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1176 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1177 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1178 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001179 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001180 used instead.
1181
1182 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1183 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1184 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1185 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1186
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001187 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1188 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1189 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1190
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001191 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001192 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1193 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001194
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001195 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001196 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001197
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001198 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1199 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1200 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001201
1202 Examples :
1203 balance roundrobin
1204 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001205 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001206 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1207 balance hdr(host)
1208 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001209
1210 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1211 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1212
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001213 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001214 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1215 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1216 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1217 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1218
1219 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1220 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1221 defaults to 16 kB.
1222
1223 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1224 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1225
1226 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1227 Round Robin.
1228
1229 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1230 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1231 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1232 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1233
1234 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1235
1236 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001237 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001238 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1239 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1240 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001241
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001242 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1243 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001244
1245
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001246bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...]
1247bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] interface <interface>
1248bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
1249bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] transparent
1250bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] id <id>
1251bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] name <name>
1252bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001253 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1254 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1255 no | yes | yes | no
1256 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001257 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1258 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1259 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1260 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1261 special address "0.0.0.0".
1262
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001263 <port_range> is either a unique TCP port, or a port range for which the
1264 proxy will accept connections for the IP address specified
1265 above. The port is mandatory. Note that in the case of an
1266 IPv6 address, the port is always the number after the last
1267 colon (':'). A range can either be :
1268 - a numerical port (ex: '80')
1269 - a dash-delimited ports range explicitly stating the lower
1270 and upper bounds (ex: '2000-2100') which are included in
1271 the range.
1272
1273 Particular care must be taken against port ranges, because
1274 every <address:port> couple consumes one socket (= a file
1275 descriptor), so it's easy to consume lots of descriptors
1276 with a simple range, and to run out of sockets. Also, each
1277 <address:port> couple must be used only once among all
1278 instances running on a same system. Please note that binding
1279 to ports lower than 1024 generally require particular
1280 privileges to start the program, which are independant of
1281 the 'uid' parameter.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001282
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001283 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1284 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1285 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1286 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1287 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1288 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1289 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1290 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1291 privileges.
1292
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001293 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1294 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1295 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1296 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1297 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1298 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1299 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1300 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1301
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001302 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1303 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1304 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1305 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001306
1307 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1308
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001309 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1310 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1311 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001312 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001313 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1314 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1315 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1316 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1317 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001318
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001319 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1320 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1321 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1322 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1323 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1324 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1325 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1326 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1327 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1328 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1329 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1330 with front firewalls which would see an established
1331 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1332
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001333 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1334 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1335 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1336 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1337 in a frontend.
1338
1339 Example :
1340 listen http_proxy
1341 bind :80,:443
1342 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1343
1344 See also : "source".
1345
1346
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001347bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1348 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1349 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1350 yes | yes | yes | yes
1351 Arguments :
1352 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1353 may be used to override a default value.
1354
1355 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1356 option may be combined with other numbers.
1357
1358 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1359 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1360 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1361 missing from all processes.
1362
1363 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1364 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1365 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1366 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1367
1368 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1369 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1370 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1371 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1372 and 'even' instances.
1373
1374 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1375 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1376 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1377 32.
1378
1379 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1380 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1381
1382 Example :
1383 listen app_ip1
1384 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1385 bind_process odd
1386
1387 listen app_ip2
1388 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1389 bind_process even
1390
1391 listen management
1392 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1393 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1394
1395 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1396
1397
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001398block { if | unless } <condition>
1399 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1400 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1401 no | yes | yes | yes
1402
1403 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1404 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001405 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001406 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1407 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1408 "block" statements per instance.
1409
1410 Example:
1411 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1412 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1413 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1414 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1415
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001416 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001417
1418
1419capture cookie <name> len <length>
1420 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1421 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1422 no | yes | yes | no
1423 Arguments :
1424 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1425 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1426 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1427 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1428 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1429
1430 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1431 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1432 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1433 right if it exceeds <length>.
1434
1435 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1436 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1437 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1438 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1439
1440 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1441 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1442 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1443
1444 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1445 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1446 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1447 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001448 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001449 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1450
1451 Example:
1452 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1453
1454 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001455 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001456
1457
1458capture request header <name> len <length>
1459 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1460 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1461 no | yes | yes | no
1462 Arguments :
1463 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001464 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001465 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1466 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1467 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1468
1469 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1470 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1471 it exceeds <length>.
1472
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001473 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001474 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1475 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001476 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1477 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1478 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1479 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001480 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001481 environments to find where the request came from.
1482
1483 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1484 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1485 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1486 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001487
1488 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1489 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1490 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1491 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1492
1493 Example:
1494 capture request header Host len 15
1495 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1496 capture request header Referrer len 15
1497
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001498 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001499 about logging.
1500
1501
1502capture response header <name> len <length>
1503 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1504 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1505 no | yes | yes | no
1506 Arguments :
1507 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001508 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001509 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1510 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1511 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1512
1513 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1514 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1515 it exceeds <length>.
1516
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001517 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001518 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1519 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1520 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001521 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1522 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1523 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1524 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001525
1526 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1527 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1528 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1529 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1530
1531 Example:
1532 capture response header Content-length len 9
1533 capture response header Location len 15
1534
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001535 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001536 about logging.
1537
1538
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001539clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001540 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1541 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1542 yes | yes | yes | no
1543 Arguments :
1544 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1545 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1546 as explained at the top of this document.
1547
1548 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1549 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1550 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1551 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1552 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1553 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1554 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1555 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001556 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001557 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1558 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1559
1560 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1561 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1562 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1563 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1564 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1565 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1566
1567 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1568 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1569
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001570 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1571 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001572
1573
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001574contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001575 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1576 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1577 yes | no | yes | yes
1578 Arguments :
1579 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1580 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1581 as explained at the top of this document.
1582
1583 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001584 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001585 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001586 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1587 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1588 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1589 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1590
1591 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1592 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1593 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1594 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1595 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1596 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1597
1598 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1599 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1600 instead.
1601
1602 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1603 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1604
1605
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001606cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001607 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001608 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1609 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1610 yes | no | yes | yes
1611 Arguments :
1612 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1613 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1614 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1615 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1616 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1617 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1618 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1619 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1620 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1621
1622 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1623 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1624 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1625 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1626 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1627 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1628 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1629 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1630 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1631 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1632 "insert" and "prefix".
1633
1634 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1635 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1636 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1637 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1638 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1639 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1640 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1641 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1642 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1643
1644 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1645 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1646 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1647 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1648 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1649 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1650 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1651 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1652 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1653 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1654 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1655
1656 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1657 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1658 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1659 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1660 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1661 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1662 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1663 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1664 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1665 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1666
1667 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1668 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1669 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1670 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1671 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1672 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1673 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1674 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1675 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1676
1677 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1678 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1679 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1680 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1681 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1682 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1683 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1684 persistence cookie in the cache.
1685 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1686
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001687 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001688 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001689 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1690 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1691 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1692 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1693 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1694 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001695
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001696 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1697 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1698 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1699 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001700
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001701 Examples :
1702 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1703 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1704 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1705
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001706 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server"
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001707 and "ignore-persist".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001708
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001709
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001710default-server [param*]
1711 Change default options for a server in a backend
1712 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1713 yes | no | yes | yes
1714 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001715 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1716 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1717 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1718 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001719
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001720 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001721 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1722
1723 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001724
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001725
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001726default_backend <backend>
1727 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1728 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1729 yes | yes | yes | no
1730 Arguments :
1731 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1732
1733 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1734 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1735 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1736 will catch all undetermined requests.
1737
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001738 Example :
1739
1740 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1741 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1742 default_backend dynamic
1743
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001744 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1745
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001746
1747disabled
1748 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1749 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1750 yes | yes | yes | yes
1751 Arguments : none
1752
1753 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1754 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1755 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1756 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1757 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1758 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1759 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1760
1761 See also : "enabled"
1762
1763
1764enabled
1765 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1766 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1767 yes | yes | yes | yes
1768 Arguments : none
1769
1770 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1771 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1772
1773 See also : "disabled"
1774
1775
1776errorfile <code> <file>
1777 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1778 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1779 yes | yes | yes | yes
1780 Arguments :
1781 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1782 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1783
1784 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001785 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001786 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001787 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1788 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001789
1790 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1791 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1792 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1793
1794 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1795 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1796 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1797 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1798
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001799 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1800 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1801 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1802 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1803 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1804 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1805
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001806 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1807 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1808 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001809 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001810 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1811
1812 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1813
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001814 Example :
1815 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1816 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1817 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1818
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001819
1820errorloc <code> <url>
1821errorloc302 <code> <url>
1822 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1823 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1824 yes | yes | yes | yes
1825 Arguments :
1826 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1827 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1828
1829 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1830 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1831 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1832 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1833 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1834
1835 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1836 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1837 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1838
1839 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1840 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1841 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1842 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1843 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1844 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1845 request.
1846
1847 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1848
1849
1850errorloc303 <code> <url>
1851 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1852 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1853 yes | yes | yes | yes
1854 Arguments :
1855 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1856 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1857
1858 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1859 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1860 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1861 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1862 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1863
1864 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1865 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1866 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1867
1868 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1869 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1870 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1871 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001872 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001873
1874 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1875
1876
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001877force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1878 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1879 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1880 no | yes | yes | yes
1881
1882 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1883 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1884 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1885 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1886 marked down for maintenance operations.
1887
1888 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1889 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1890 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1891 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1892 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1893 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1894 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1895 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1896 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1897
1898 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1899 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1900 is used.
1901
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001902 See also : "option redispatch", "ignore-persist", "persist",
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001903 and section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001904
1905
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001906fullconn <conns>
1907 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1908 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1909 yes | no | yes | yes
1910 Arguments :
1911 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1912 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1913
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001914 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001915 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001916 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001917 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1918 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1919 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1920 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1921 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001922 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001923
1924 Example :
1925 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1926 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1927 # connections.
1928 backend dynamic
1929 fullconn 10000
1930 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1931 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1932
1933 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1934
1935
1936grace <time>
1937 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1938 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001939 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001940 Arguments :
1941 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1942 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1943 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1944
1945 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1946 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001947 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001948 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1949
1950 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1951 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1952 simplify it.
1953
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001954
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001955hash-type <method>
1956 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1957 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1958 yes | no | yes | yes
1959 Arguments :
1960 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1961 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1962 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1963 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1964 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1965 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1966 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1967 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1968 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1969
1970 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1971 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1972 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1973 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1974 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1975 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1976 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1977 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1978 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1979 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1980 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1981 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1982 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1983
1984 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1985
1986 See also : "balance", "server"
1987
1988
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001989http-check disable-on-404
1990 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1991 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001992 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001993 Arguments : none
1994
1995 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1996 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1997 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1998 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1999 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
2000 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
2001 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
2002 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
2003 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
2004
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002005 See also : "option httpchk"
2006
2007
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002008http-check send-state
2009 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
2010 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2011 yes | no | yes | yes
2012 Arguments : none
2013
2014 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
2015 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
2016 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
2017 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
2018 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
2019
2020 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
2021 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2022 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2023 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2024 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2025 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2026 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2027 checked in multiple backends.
2028
2029 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2030 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2031
2032 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2033 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2034 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2035 one fails.
2036
2037 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2038 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2039 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2040
2041 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2042 server's queue.
2043
2044 Example of a header received by the application server :
2045 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2046 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2047
2048 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2049
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002050http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2051 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002052 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2053
2054 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2055 no | yes | yes | yes
2056
2057 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2058 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2059 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2060 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2061 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2062 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2063
2064 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2065 instance.
2066
2067 Example:
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002068 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2069 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2070 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002071
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002072 http-request allow if nagios
2073 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2074 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2075 http-request deny
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002076
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002077 Example:
2078 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002079
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002080 http-request auth unless auth_ok
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002081
2082 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002083
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002084id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002085 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2086 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2087 no | yes | yes | yes
2088 Arguments : none
2089
2090 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2091 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2092 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002093
2094
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02002095ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
2096 Declare a condition to ignore persistence
2097 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2098 no | yes | yes | yes
2099
2100 By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
2101 the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
2102 and running).
2103
2104 The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
2105 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
2106 This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
2107 oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
2108 persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
2109
2110 Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
2111 the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
2112
2113 The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
2114 "unless" condition is met.
2115
2116 See also : "force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
2117
2118
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002119log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002120log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002121 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2122 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2123 yes | yes | yes | yes
2124 Arguments :
2125 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2126 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2127 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2128 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2129 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2130 parameter.
2131
2132 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2133 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2134
2135 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2136 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2137 standard syslog port).
2138
2139 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2140 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2141 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2142 appropriately writeable).
2143
2144 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2145
2146 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2147 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2148 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2149
2150 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2151 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2152 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002153 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2154 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2155 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2156 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2157 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002158
2159 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2160
2161 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2162 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2163 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2164
2165 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002166 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2167 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2168 "info".
2169
2170 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2171 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2172 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2173 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2174
2175 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2176 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002177
2178 Example :
2179 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002180 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2181 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002182
2183
2184maxconn <conns>
2185 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2186 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2187 yes | yes | yes | no
2188 Arguments :
2189 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2190 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2191 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2192 closes.
2193
2194 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2195 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2196 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2197 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2198 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2199 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2200 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2201 properly tuned.
2202
2203 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2204 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2205 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2206
2207 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2208
2209
2210mode { tcp|http|health }
2211 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2212 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2213 yes | yes | yes | yes
2214 Arguments :
2215 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2216 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2217 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2218 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2219
2220 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2221 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2222 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2223 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2224 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2225
2226 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2227 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2228 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2229 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2230 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2231 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2232
2233 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2234 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2235 will be refused.
2236
2237 Example :
2238 defaults http_instances
2239 mode http
2240
2241 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2242
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002243
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002244monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002245 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002246 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2247 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002248 Arguments :
2249 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2250 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002251 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002252 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2253 backend and its backup.
2254
2255 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2256 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2257 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2258 servers in a list of backends.
2259
2260 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2261 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2262 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2263 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2264 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2265 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2266 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002267 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002268
2269 Example:
2270 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002271 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002272 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2273 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2274 monitor-uri /site_alive
2275 monitor fail if site_dead
2276
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002277 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2278
2279
2280monitor-net <source>
2281 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2282 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2283 yes | yes | yes | no
2284 Arguments :
2285 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2286 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2287 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2288 followed by a mask.
2289
2290 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2291 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002292 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002293 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2294
2295 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2296 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2297 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2298 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2299 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2300
2301 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2302 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2303 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2304 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2305 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2306
Willy Tarreau95cd2832010-03-04 23:36:33 +01002307 Last, please note that only one "monitor-net" statement can be specified in
2308 a frontend. If more than one is found, only the last one will be considered.
2309
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002310 Example :
2311 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2312 frontend www
2313 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2314
2315 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2316
2317
2318monitor-uri <uri>
2319 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2320 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2321 yes | yes | yes | no
2322 Arguments :
2323 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2324 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2325
2326 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2327 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2328 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2329 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2330 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2331 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2332 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2333 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2334
2335 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2336 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2337 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2338 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2339 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2340 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2341
2342 Example :
2343 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2344 frontend www
2345 mode http
2346 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2347
2348 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2349
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002350
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002351option abortonclose
2352no option abortonclose
2353 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2354 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2355 yes | no | yes | yes
2356 Arguments : none
2357
2358 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2359 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2360 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2361 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002362 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002363 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2364 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2365 encountered while delivering the response.
2366
2367 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2368 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2369 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2370 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2371 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2372 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002373 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002374 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002375 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002376 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2377 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2378 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2379
2380 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2381 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2382 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2383 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2384 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2385 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2386 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2387 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002388 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002389
2390 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2391 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2392
2393 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2394
2395
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002396option accept-invalid-http-request
2397no option accept-invalid-http-request
2398 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2399 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2400 yes | yes | yes | no
2401 Arguments : none
2402
2403 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2404 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2405 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2406 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2407 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2408 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2409 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2410 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2411 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2412
2413 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2414 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2415 been confirmed.
2416
2417 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2418 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2419 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2420 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2421
2422 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2423 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2424
2425 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2426 stats socket.
2427
2428
2429option accept-invalid-http-response
2430no option accept-invalid-http-response
2431 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2432 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2433 yes | no | yes | yes
2434 Arguments : none
2435
2436 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2437 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2438 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2439 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2440 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2441 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2442 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2443 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2444 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2445
2446 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2447 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2448 been confirmed.
2449
2450 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2451 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2452 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2453 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2454
2455 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2456 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2457
2458 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2459 stats socket.
2460
2461
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002462option allbackups
2463no option allbackups
2464 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2465 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2466 yes | no | yes | yes
2467 Arguments : none
2468
2469 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2470 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2471 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2472 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2473 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2474 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2475 order between the backup servers anymore.
2476
2477 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2478 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2479
2480 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2481 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2482
2483
2484option checkcache
2485no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002486 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002487 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2488 yes | no | yes | yes
2489 Arguments : none
2490
2491 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2492 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002493 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002494 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2495 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2496 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2497
2498 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002499 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002500 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002501 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2502 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002503 to the client are :
2504 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002505 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002506 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002507 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2508 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2509 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2510 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2511 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2512 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2513 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2514 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2515 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2516 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2517 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2518
2519 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002520 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002521 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002522 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002523 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2524
2525 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2526 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002527 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002528 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2529
2530 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2531 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2532
2533
2534option clitcpka
2535no option clitcpka
2536 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2537 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2538 yes | yes | yes | no
2539 Arguments : none
2540
2541 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2542 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2543 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2544 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2545
2546 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2547 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2548 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2549 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2550
2551 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2552 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2553 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2554 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2555 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2556
2557 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2558
2559 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2560 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2561 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2562
2563 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2564 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2565
2566 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2567
2568
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002569option contstats
2570 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2571 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2572 yes | yes | yes | no
2573 Arguments : none
2574
2575 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2576 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2577 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2578 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2579 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2580 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2581 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2582
2583
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002584option dontlog-normal
2585no option dontlog-normal
2586 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2587 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2588 yes | yes | yes | no
2589 Arguments : none
2590
2591 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2592 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2593 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2594 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2595 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2596 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2597 logged.
2598
2599 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2600 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2601 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2602
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002603 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002604 logging.
2605
2606
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002607option dontlognull
2608no option dontlognull
2609 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2610 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2611 yes | yes | yes | no
2612 Arguments : none
2613
2614 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2615 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2616 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2617 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2618 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2619 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2620 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2621
2622 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2623 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2624 would not be logged.
2625
2626 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2627 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2628
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002629 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002630
2631
2632option forceclose
2633no option forceclose
2634 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2635 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002636 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002637 Arguments : none
2638
2639 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2640 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2641 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2642 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2643 global session times in the logs.
2644
2645 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002646 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002647 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2648 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2649 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2650 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002651
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002652 This option may also be combined with "option http-pretend-keepalive", which
2653 will disable sending of the "Connection: close" header, but will still cause
2654 the connection to be closed once the whole response is received.
2655
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002656 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2657 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2658
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002659 See also : "option httpclose" and "option http-pretend-keepalive"
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002660
2661
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002662option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002663 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2664 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2665 yes | yes | yes | yes
2666 Arguments :
2667 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2668 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002669 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002670 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002671
2672 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2673 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2674 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2675 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2676 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2677 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2678 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002679 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2680 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2681 possible that the client has already brought one.
2682
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002683 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002684 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002685 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2686 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002687 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2688 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002689
2690 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2691 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2692 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2693 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2694 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2695 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2696 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2697
2698 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002699 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2700 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2701 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002702
2703 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2704 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2705 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2706 when using this option.
2707
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002708 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002709 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2710 frontend www
2711 mode http
2712 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2713
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002714 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2715 backend www
2716 mode http
2717 option forwardfor header X-Client
2718
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002719 See also : "option httpclose"
2720
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002721
2722option http-pretend-keepalive
2723no option http-pretend-keepalive
2724 Define whether haproxy will announce keepalive to the server or not
2725 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2726 yes | yes | yes | yes
2727 Arguments : none
2728
2729 When running with "option http-server-close" or "option forceclose", haproxy
2730 adds a "Connection: close" header to the request forwarded to the server.
2731 Unfortunately, when some servers see this header, they automatically refrain
2732 from using the chunked encoding for responses of unknown length, while this
2733 is totally unrelated. The immediate effect is that this prevents haproxy from
2734 maintaining the client connection alive. A second effect is that a client or
2735 a cache could receive an incomplete response without being aware of it, and
2736 consider the response complete.
2737
2738 By setting "option http-pretend-keepalive", haproxy will make the server
2739 believe it will keep the connection alive. The server will then not fall back
2740 to the abnormal undesired above. When haproxy gets the whole response, it
2741 will close the connection with the server just as it would do with the
2742 "forceclose" option. That way the client gets a normal response and the
2743 connection is correctly closed on the server side.
2744
2745 It is recommended not to enable this option by default, because most servers
2746 will more efficiently close the connection themselves after the last packet,
2747 and release its buffers slightly earlier. Also, the added packet on the
2748 network could slightly reduce the overall peak performance. However it is
2749 worth noting that when this option is enabled, haproxy will have slightly
2750 less work to do. So if haproxy is the bottleneck on the whole architecture,
2751 enabling this option might save a few CPU cycles.
2752
2753 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2754 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2755 This option has no effect if it is combined with "option httpclose", which
2756 has precedence.
2757
2758 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2759 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2760
2761 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
2762
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002763
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002764option http-server-close
2765no option http-server-close
2766 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2767 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2768 yes | yes | yes | yes
2769 Arguments : none
2770
2771 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2772 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2773 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2774 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2775 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2776 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002777 of RFC2616. Please note that some servers do not always conform to those
2778 requirements when they see "Connection: close" in the request. The effect
2779 will be that keep-alive will never be used. A workaround consists in enabling
2780 "option http-pretend-keepalive".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002781
2782 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2783 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2784 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2785 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002786 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2787 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002788
2789 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2790 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002791 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2792 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2793 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002794
2795 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2796 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2797
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002798 See also : "option forceclose", "option http-pretend-keepalive" and
2799 "option httpclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002800
2801
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002802option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002803no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002804 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2805 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2806 yes | yes | yes | no
2807 Arguments : none
2808
2809 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2810 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2811 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2812 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2813 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2814 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2815 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2816
2817 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2818 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2819 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2820 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2821 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2822 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2823 request along its whole life.
2824
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002825 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2826 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2827 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2828 front of an existing proxy.
2829
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002830 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2831
2832 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2833 http-server-close".
2834
2835
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01002836option httpchk
2837option httpchk <uri>
2838option httpchk <method> <uri>
2839option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2840 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2841 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2842 yes | no | yes | yes
2843 Arguments :
2844 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2845 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2846 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2847 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2848 ones.
2849
2850 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2851 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2852 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2853
2854 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2855 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2856 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2857 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2858 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2859
2860 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2861 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2862 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2863 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2864 the lack of any response.
2865
2866 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2867
2868 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2869 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2870 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2871
2872 Examples :
2873 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2874 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2875 backend https_relay
2876 mode tcp
2877 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
2878 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2879
2880 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2881 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
2882
2883
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002884option httpclose
2885no option httpclose
2886 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2887 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2888 yes | yes | yes | yes
2889 Arguments : none
2890
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02002891 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yet support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002892 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2893 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2894 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2895 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2896 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2897 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2898 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2899 be removed.
2900
2901 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002902 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2903 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2904 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2905 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2906 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2907 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002908
2909 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2910 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2911 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002912 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2913 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002914
2915 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2916 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2917
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002918 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002919
2920
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002921option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002922 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2923 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2924 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002925 Arguments :
2926 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2927 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2928 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2929 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2930 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002931
2932 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2933 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2934 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2935 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2936 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2937 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2938 ports.
2939
2940 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2941
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002942 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2943 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2944 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2945 by default.
2946
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002947 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002948
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002949
2950option http_proxy
2951no option http_proxy
2952 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2953 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2954 yes | yes | yes | yes
2955 Arguments : none
2956
2957 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2958 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2959 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2960 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2961 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2962
2963 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2964 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2965 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2966 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2967 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2968 be analyzed.
2969
2970 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2971 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2972
2973 Example :
2974 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2975 backend direct_forward
2976 option httpclose
2977 option http_proxy
2978
2979 See also : "option httpclose"
2980
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002981
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02002982option ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
2983 Declare a condition to ignore persistence
2984 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2985 no | yes | yes | yes
2986
2987 By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
2988 the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
2989 and running).
2990
2991 The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
2992 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
2993 This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
2994 oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
2995 persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
2996
2997 Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
2998 the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
2999
3000 The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
3001 "unless" condition is met.
3002
3003 See also : "option force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
3004
3005
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02003006option independant-streams
3007no option independant-streams
3008 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
3009 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3010 yes | yes | yes | yes
3011 Arguments : none
3012
3013 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
3014 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
3015 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
3016 receive data or not.
3017
3018 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
3019 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
3020 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
3021 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
3022 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
3023 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
3024 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
3025 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
3026 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
3027 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
3028 socket buffers.
3029
3030 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
3031 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
3032 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
3033 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
3034 slow lines, so use it with caution.
3035
3036 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
3037
3038
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02003039option log-health-checks
3040no option log-health-checks
3041 Enable or disable logging of health checks
3042 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3043 yes | no | yes | yes
3044 Arguments : none
3045
3046 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
3047 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
3048 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
3049 of additional information is limited.
3050
3051 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
3052 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
3053
3054 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
3055
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003056
3057option log-separate-errors
3058no option log-separate-errors
3059 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
3060 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3061 yes | yes | yes | no
3062 Arguments : none
3063
3064 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
3065 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
3066 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
3067 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
3068 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
3069 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
3070 provides very important information.
3071
3072 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
3073 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
3074 error logs.
3075
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003076 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003077 logging.
3078
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003079
3080option logasap
3081no option logasap
3082 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
3083 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3084 yes | yes | yes | no
3085 Arguments : none
3086
3087 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
3088 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
3089 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
3090 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
3091 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
3092 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
3093 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003094 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003095 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
3096 bytes are expected to be transferred.
3097
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01003098 Examples :
3099 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
3100 mode http
3101 option httplog
3102 option logasap
3103 log 192.168.2.200 local3
3104
3105 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
3106 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
3107 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
3108 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
3109
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003110 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003111 logging.
3112
3113
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01003114option mysql-check
3115 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
3116 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3117 yes | no | yes | yes
3118 Arguments : none
3119
3120 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
3121 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
3122 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3123 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3124 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3125
3126 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3127 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3128 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3129 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3130 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3131 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3132
3133 See also: "option httpchk"
3134
3135
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003136option nolinger
3137no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003138 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003139 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3140 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003141 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003142
3143 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3144 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3145 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3146 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3147 connections.
3148
3149 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3150 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3151 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3152 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3153 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3154 this too.
3155
3156 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3157 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3158 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3159
3160 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3161 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3162 for servers.
3163
3164 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3165 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3166
3167
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003168option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3169 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3170 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3171 yes | yes | yes | yes
3172 Arguments :
3173 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3174 matching <network>
3175 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3176 header name.
3177
3178 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3179 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3180 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3181 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3182 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3183 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3184 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3185 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3186 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3187 possible that the client has already brought one.
3188
3189 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3190 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3191 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3192 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3193 header and requires different one.
3194
3195 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3196 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3197 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3198 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3199 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3200 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3201 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3202
3203 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3204 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3205 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3206 both are defined.
3207
3208 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3209 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3210 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3211 when using this option.
3212
3213 Examples :
3214 # Original Destination address
3215 frontend www
3216 mode http
3217 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3218
3219 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3220 backend www
3221 mode http
3222 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3223
3224 See also : "option httpclose"
3225
3226
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003227option persist
3228no option persist
3229 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3230 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3231 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003232 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003233
3234 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3235 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3236 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3237 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3238 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3239 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3240 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3241 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3242 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3243 redirected to another valid server.
3244
3245 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3246 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3247
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003248 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003249
3250
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003251option redispatch
3252no option redispatch
3253 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3254 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3255 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003256 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003257
3258 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3259 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3260 be able to access the service anymore.
3261
3262 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3263 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3264
3265 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3266 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3267 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003268
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003269 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3270 "redisp" keywords.
3271
3272 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3273 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3274
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003275 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003276
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003277
3278option smtpchk
3279option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3280 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3281 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3282 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003283 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003284 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3285 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3286 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3287
3288 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3289 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3290 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3291
3292 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3293 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3294 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3295 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3296 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3297 dead server.
3298
3299 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3300 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3301 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3302 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3303
3304 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3305 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3306 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3307 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3308 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3309
3310 Example :
3311 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3312
3313 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3314
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003315
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003316option socket-stats
3317no option socket-stats
3318
3319 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3320 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3321 yes | yes | yes | no
3322
3323 Arguments : none
3324
3325
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003326option splice-auto
3327no option splice-auto
3328 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3329 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3330 yes | yes | yes | yes
3331 Arguments : none
3332
3333 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3334 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3335 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3336 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003337 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003338 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3339 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3340 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3341 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3342
3343 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3344 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3345 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3346 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3347 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3348 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3349 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3350 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3351 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3352 keyword.
3353
3354 Example :
3355 option splice-auto
3356
3357 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3358 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3359
3360 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3361 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3362
3363
3364option splice-request
3365no option splice-request
3366 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3367 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3368 yes | yes | yes | yes
3369 Arguments : none
3370
3371 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3372 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3373 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3374 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3375 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3376 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3377
3378 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3379
3380 Example :
3381 option splice-request
3382
3383 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3384 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3385
3386 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3387 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3388
3389
3390option splice-response
3391no option splice-response
3392 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3393 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3394 yes | yes | yes | yes
3395 Arguments : none
3396
3397 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3398 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3399 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3400 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3401 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3402 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3403
3404 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3405
3406 Example :
3407 option splice-response
3408
3409 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3410 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3411
3412 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3413 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3414
3415
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003416option srvtcpka
3417no option srvtcpka
3418 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3419 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3420 yes | no | yes | yes
3421 Arguments : none
3422
3423 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3424 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3425 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3426 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3427
3428 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3429 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3430 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3431 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3432
3433 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3434 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3435 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3436 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3437 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3438
3439 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3440
3441 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3442 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3443 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3444
3445 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3446 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3447
3448 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3449
3450
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003451option ssl-hello-chk
3452 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3453 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3454 yes | no | yes | yes
3455 Arguments : none
3456
3457 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3458 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3459 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3460 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3461 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3462 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3463 hello message.
3464
3465 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3466 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3467 messages, which is appreciable.
3468
3469 See also: "option httpchk"
3470
3471
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003472option tcp-smart-accept
3473no option tcp-smart-accept
3474 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3475 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3476 yes | yes | yes | no
3477 Arguments : none
3478
3479 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3480 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3481 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3482 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3483 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3484 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3485
3486 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3487 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3488 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3489 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3490
3491 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3492 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3493 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3494 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3495
3496 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3497 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3498 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3499
3500 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3501 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3502 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3503
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003504 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3505
3506
3507option tcp-smart-connect
3508no option tcp-smart-connect
3509 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3510 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3511 yes | no | yes | yes
3512 Arguments : none
3513
3514 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3515 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3516 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3517 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3518 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3519
3520 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3521 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3522 complex.
3523
3524 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3525 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3526 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3527
3528 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3529 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3530
3531 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3532
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003533
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003534option tcpka
3535 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3536 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3537 yes | yes | yes | yes
3538 Arguments : none
3539
3540 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3541 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3542 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3543 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3544
3545 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3546 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3547 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3548 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3549
3550 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3551 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3552 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3553 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3554 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3555
3556 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3557
3558 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3559 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3560 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3561 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3562 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3563 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3564 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3565 backends.
3566
3567 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3568
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003569
3570option tcplog
3571 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3572 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3573 yes | yes | yes | yes
3574 Arguments : none
3575
3576 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3577 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3578 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3579 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3580 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3581 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3582 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3583 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3584
3585 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3586
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003587 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003588
3589
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003590option transparent
3591no option transparent
3592 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3593 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003594 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003595 Arguments : none
3596
3597 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3598 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3599 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3600 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3601 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3602 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3603 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3604 appropriate server.
3605
3606 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3607 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3608
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003609 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3610 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003611
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003612
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003613persist rdp-cookie
3614persist rdp-cookie(name)
3615 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3616 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3617 yes | no | yes | yes
3618 Arguments :
3619 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
Willy Tarreau61e28f22010-05-16 22:31:05 +02003620 default cookie name "msts" will be used. There currently is no
3621 valid reason to change this name.
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003622
3623 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3624 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3625 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3626 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3627 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3628 forwarded to this server.
3629
3630 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3631 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3632 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003633 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003634 a single "listen" section.
3635
Willy Tarreau61e28f22010-05-16 22:31:05 +02003636 Also, it is important to understand that the terminal server will emit this
3637 RDP cookie only if it is configured for "token redirection mode", which means
3638 that the "IP address redirection" option is disabled.
3639
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003640 Example :
3641 listen tse-farm
3642 bind :3389
3643 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3644 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3645 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3646 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3647 persist rdp-cookie
3648 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3649 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3650 balance rdp-cookie
3651 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3652 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3653
3654 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3655
3656
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003657rate-limit sessions <rate>
3658 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3659 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3660 yes | yes | yes | no
3661 Arguments :
3662 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3663 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3664
3665 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3666 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3667 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3668 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3669 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3670 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3671
3672 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3673 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3674 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3675 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3676
3677 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3678 listen smtp
3679 mode tcp
3680 bind :25
3681 rate-limit sessions 10
3682 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3683
3684 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3685 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3686
3687 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3688
3689
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003690redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3691redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003692 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3693 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3694 no | yes | yes | yes
3695
3696 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003697 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003698
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003699 Arguments :
3700 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3701 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3702 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3703 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003704 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3705 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3706 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3707 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003708
3709 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3710 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3711 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3712 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3713 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3714 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3715 location with a GET method.
3716
3717 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3718 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3719
3720 - "drop-query"
3721 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3722 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3723 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3724 with a location-type redirect.
3725
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003726 - "append-slash"
3727 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3728 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3729 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3730 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3731
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003732 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3733 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3734 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3735 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3736 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3737 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3738 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3739
3740 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3741 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3742 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3743 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3744 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3745 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3746 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003747
3748 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3749 acl clear dst_port 80
3750 acl secure dst_port 8080
3751 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003752 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003753 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003754 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3755
3756 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003757 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3758 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3759 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003760 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003761
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003762 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3763 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3764 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3765
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003766 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003767
3768
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003769redisp (deprecated)
3770redispatch (deprecated)
3771 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3772 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3773 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003774 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003775
3776 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3777 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3778 be able to access the service anymore.
3779
3780 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3781 redistribute them to a working server.
3782
3783 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3784 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3785 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003786
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003787 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3788 "option redispatch" instead.
3789
3790 See also : "option redispatch"
3791
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003792
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003793reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003794 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3795 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3796 no | yes | yes | yes
3797 Arguments :
3798 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3799 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003800 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003801
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003802 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3803 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3804
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003805 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3806 the last header of an HTTP request.
3807
3808 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3809 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3810 responses.
3811
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003812 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3813 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3814 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3815
3816 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3817 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003818
3819
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003820reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3821reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003822 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3823 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3824 no | yes | yes | yes
3825 Arguments :
3826 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3827 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3828 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3829 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3830 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3831 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3832 ignores case.
3833
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003834 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3835 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3836
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003837 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3838 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3839 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3840 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003841 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003842
3843 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3844 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3845
3846 Example :
3847 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3848 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3849 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3850
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003851 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3852 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003853
3854
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003855reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3856reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003857 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3858 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3859 no | yes | yes | yes
3860 Arguments :
3861 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3862 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3863 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3864 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3865 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3866 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3867
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003868 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3869 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3870
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003871 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3872 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3873 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3874 next servers.
3875
3876 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3877 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3878 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3879
3880 Example :
3881 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3882 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3883 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3884
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003885 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3886 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003887
3888
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003889reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3890reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003891 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3892 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3893 no | yes | yes | yes
3894 Arguments :
3895 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3896 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3897 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3898 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3899 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3900 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3901 case.
3902
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003903 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3904 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3905
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003906 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3907 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3908 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3909 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003910 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003911
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003912 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003913 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003914 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003915
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003916 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3917 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3918
3919 Example :
3920 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3921 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3922 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3923
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003924 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3925 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003926
3927
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003928reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3929reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003930 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3931 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3932 no | yes | yes | yes
3933 Arguments :
3934 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3935 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3936 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3937 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3938 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3939 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3940 case.
3941
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003942 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3943 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3944
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003945 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3946 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3947 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3948 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3949
3950 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3951 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3952
3953 Example :
3954 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3955 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3956 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3957 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3958
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003959 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3960 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003961
3962
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003963reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3964reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003965 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3966 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3967 no | yes | yes | yes
3968 Arguments :
3969 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3970 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3971 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3972 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3973 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3974 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3975
3976 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3977 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3978 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3979 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003980 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003981
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003982 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3983 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3984
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003985 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3986 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3987 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3988
3989 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3990 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3991 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3992 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3993 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3994
3995 Example :
3996 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3997 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3998 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3999 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
4000
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004001 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
4002 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004003
4004
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004005reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4006reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004007 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
4008 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4009 no | yes | yes | yes
4010 Arguments :
4011 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4012 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
4013 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
4014 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
4015 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
4016 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
4017 ignores case.
4018
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004019 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4020 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4021
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004022 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4023 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004024 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
4025 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
4026 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004027 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
4028 not set.
4029
4030 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
4031 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
4032 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
4033 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
4034 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
4035
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004036 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004037 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
4038 # block all others.
4039 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
4040 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
4041
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004042 # block bad guys
4043 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
4044 reqitarpit . if badguys
4045
4046 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
4047 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004048
4049
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02004050retries <value>
4051 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
4052 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4053 yes | no | yes | yes
4054 Arguments :
4055 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
4056 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
4057 default value is 3.
4058
4059 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
4060 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
4061 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
4062
4063 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
4064 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
4065
4066 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
4067 server even if a cookie references a different server.
4068
4069 See also : "option redispatch"
4070
4071
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004072rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004073 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
4074 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4075 no | yes | yes | yes
4076 Arguments :
4077 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4078 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004079 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004080
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004081 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4082 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4083
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004084 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
4085 the last header of an HTTP response.
4086
4087 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4088 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4089 responses.
4090
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004091 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
4092 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004093
4094
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004095rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4096rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004097 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
4098 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4099 no | yes | yes | yes
4100 Arguments :
4101 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4102 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4103 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4104 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4105 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4106 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
4107 ignores case.
4108
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004109 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4110 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4111
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004112 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
4113 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
4114 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
4115 client.
4116
4117 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4118 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4119 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
4120
4121 Example :
4122 # remove the Server header from responses
4123 reqidel ^Server:.*
4124
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004125 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
4126 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004127
4128
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004129rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4130rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004131 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4132 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4133 no | yes | yes | yes
4134 Arguments :
4135 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4136 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4137 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4138 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4139 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4140 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4141 ignores case.
4142
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004143 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4144 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4145
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004146 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4147 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4148 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4149 case-sensitive.
4150
4151 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004152 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4153 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4154 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004155
4156 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4157 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4158
4159 Example :
4160 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4161 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4162
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004163 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4164 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004165
4166
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004167rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4168rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004169 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4170 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4171 no | yes | yes | yes
4172 Arguments :
4173 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4174 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4175 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4176 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4177 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4178 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4179 ignores case.
4180
4181 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4182 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4183 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4184 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004185 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004186
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004187 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4188 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4189
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004190 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4191 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4192 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4193
4194 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4195 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4196 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4197 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4198 are not case-sensitive.
4199
4200 Example :
4201 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4202 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4203
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004204 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4205 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004206
4207
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004208server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4209 Declare a server in a backend
4210 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4211 no | no | yes | yes
4212 Arguments :
4213 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4214 appear in logs and alerts.
4215
4216 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4217 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4218 start-up.
4219
4220 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4221 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4222 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4223 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4224 adding this value to the client's port.
4225
4226 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4227 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004228 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004229
4230 Examples :
4231 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4232 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4233
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004234 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004235
4236
4237source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004238source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004239source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004240 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4241 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4242 yes | no | yes | yes
4243 Arguments :
4244 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4245 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4246 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4247 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4248
4249 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4250 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004251 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4252 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4253 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004254
4255 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4256 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4257 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4258 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4259 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4260 <addr>.
4261
4262 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4263 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4264 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4265 port.
4266
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004267 <hdr> is the name of a HTTP header in which to fetch the IP to bind to.
4268 This is the name of a comma-separated header list which can
4269 contain multiple IP addresses. By default, the last occurrence is
4270 used. This is designed to work with the X-Forwarded-For header
4271 and to automatically bind to the the client's IP address as seen
4272 by previous proxy, typically Stunnel. In order to use another
4273 occurrence from the last one, please see the <occ> parameter
4274 below. When the header (or occurrence) is not found, no binding
4275 is performed so that the proxy's default IP address is used. Also
4276 keep in mind that the header name is case insensitive, as for any
4277 HTTP header.
4278
4279 <occ> is the occurrence number of a value to be used in a multi-value
4280 header. This is to be used in conjunction with "hdr_ip(<hdr>)",
4281 in order to specificy which occurrence to use for the source IP
4282 address. Positive values indicate a position from the first
4283 occurrence, 1 being the first one. Negative values indicate
4284 positions relative to the last one, -1 being the last one. This
4285 is helpful for situations where an X-Forwarded-For header is set
4286 at the entry point of an infrastructure and must be used several
4287 proxy layers away. When this value is not specified, -1 is
4288 assumed. Passing a zero here disables the feature.
4289
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004290 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4291 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4292 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4293 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4294 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4295 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4296
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004297 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4298 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4299 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4300 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4301
4302 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4303 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4304 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4305 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4306 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4307 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4308
4309 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4310 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4311 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4312 there are two methods :
4313
4314 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4315 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4316 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4317 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4318 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4319 of the client ranges may be used.
4320
4321 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4322 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4323 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4324 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4325 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4326 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4327 same session.
4328
4329 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4330 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4331 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4332 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4333 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4334 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4335
4336 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4337 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4338 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004339 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004340
4341 Examples :
4342 backend private
4343 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4344 source 192.168.1.200
4345
4346 backend transparent_ssl1
4347 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4348 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4349
4350 backend transparent_ssl2
4351 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4352 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4353 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4354
4355 backend transparent_ssl3
4356 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4357 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4358 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4359
4360 backend transparent_smtp
4361 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4362 # with Tproxy version 4.
4363 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4364
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004365 backend transparent_http
4366 # Connect to the servers using the client's IP as seen by previous
4367 # proxy.
4368 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1)
4369
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004370 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004371 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4372
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004373
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004374srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4375 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4376 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4377 yes | no | yes | yes
4378 Arguments :
4379 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4380 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4381 as explained at the top of this document.
4382
4383 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4384 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4385 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4386 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4387 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4388 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4389 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4390
4391 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4392 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4393 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4394 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4395 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004396 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004397 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004398 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004399
4400 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4401 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4402 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4403 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4404 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4405 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4406
4407 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4408 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4409
4410 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4411
4412
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004413stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4414 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4415 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4416 yes | no | yes | yes
4417 Arguments :
4418 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4419
4420 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4421
4422 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4423 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4424 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4425 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4426 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4427 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4428
4429 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4430 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4431 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4432 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4433
4434 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4435 report using "stats scope".
4436
4437 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4438 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4439 unobvious parameters.
4440
4441 Example :
4442 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4443 backend public_www
4444 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4445 stats enable
4446 stats hide-version
4447 stats scope .
4448 stats uri /admin?stats
4449 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4450 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4451 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4452
4453 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4454 backend private_monitoring
4455 stats enable
4456 stats uri /admin?stats
4457 stats refresh 5s
4458
4459 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4460
4461
4462stats enable
4463 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4464 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4465 yes | no | yes | yes
4466 Arguments : none
4467
4468 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4469 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4470 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4471 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4472 - stats auth : no authentication
4473 - stats scope : no restriction
4474
4475 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4476 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4477 unobvious parameters.
4478
4479 Example :
4480 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4481 backend public_www
4482 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4483 stats enable
4484 stats hide-version
4485 stats scope .
4486 stats uri /admin?stats
4487 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4488 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4489 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4490
4491 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4492 backend private_monitoring
4493 stats enable
4494 stats uri /admin?stats
4495 stats refresh 5s
4496
4497 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4498
4499
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004500stats hide-version
4501 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004502 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4503 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004504 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004505
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004506 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4507 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4508 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4509 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4510 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4511 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004512
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004513 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4514 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4515 unobvious parameters.
4516
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004517 Example :
4518 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4519 backend public_www
4520 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004521 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004522 stats hide-version
4523 stats scope .
4524 stats uri /admin?stats
4525 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4526 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4527 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004528
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004529 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4530 backend private_monitoring
4531 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004532 stats uri /admin?stats
4533 stats refresh 5s
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004534
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004535 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004536
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004537
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004538stats realm <realm>
4539 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4540 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4541 yes | no | yes | yes
4542 Arguments :
4543 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4544 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4545 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4546
4547 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4548 using a backslash ('\').
4549
4550 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4551 only related to authentication.
4552
4553 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4554 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4555 unobvious parameters.
4556
4557 Example :
4558 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4559 backend public_www
4560 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4561 stats enable
4562 stats hide-version
4563 stats scope .
4564 stats uri /admin?stats
4565 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4566 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4567 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4568
4569 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4570 backend private_monitoring
4571 stats enable
4572 stats uri /admin?stats
4573 stats refresh 5s
4574
4575 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4576
4577
4578stats refresh <delay>
4579 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4580 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4581 yes | no | yes | yes
4582 Arguments :
4583 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4584 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4585 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4586 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4587 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4588 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4589
4590 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4591 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4592 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4593 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4594
4595 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4596 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4597 unobvious parameters.
4598
4599 Example :
4600 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4601 backend public_www
4602 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4603 stats enable
4604 stats hide-version
4605 stats scope .
4606 stats uri /admin?stats
4607 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4608 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4609 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4610
4611 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4612 backend private_monitoring
4613 stats enable
4614 stats uri /admin?stats
4615 stats refresh 5s
4616
4617 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4618
4619
4620stats scope { <name> | "." }
4621 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4622 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4623 yes | no | yes | yes
4624 Arguments :
4625 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4626 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4627 section in which the statement appears.
4628
4629 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4630 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4631 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4632 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4633 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4634 exists.
4635
4636 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4637 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4638 unobvious parameters.
4639
4640 Example :
4641 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4642 backend public_www
4643 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4644 stats enable
4645 stats hide-version
4646 stats scope .
4647 stats uri /admin?stats
4648 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4649 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4650 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4651
4652 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4653 backend private_monitoring
4654 stats enable
4655 stats uri /admin?stats
4656 stats refresh 5s
4657
4658 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4659
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004660
4661stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4662 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4663 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4664 yes | no | yes | yes
4665
4666 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4667 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4668
4669 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4670 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
4671
4672 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4673 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4674 unobvious parameters.
4675
4676 Example :
4677 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4678 backend private_monitoring
4679 stats enable
4680 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
4681 stats uri /admin?stats
4682 stats refresh 5s
4683
4684 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4685 global section.
4686
4687
4688stats show-legends
4689 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4690 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4691 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4692 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4693 - IP (socket, server)
4694 - cookie (backend, server)
4695
4696 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4697 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4698 unobvious parameters.
4699
4700 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
4701
4702
4703stats show-node [ <name> ]
4704 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4705 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4706 yes | no | yes | yes
4707 Arguments:
4708 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4709 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
4710
4711 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4712 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4713 provided for each customer.
4714
4715 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4716 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4717 unobvious parameters.
4718
4719 Example:
4720 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4721 backend private_monitoring
4722 stats enable
4723 stats show-node Europe-1
4724 stats uri /admin?stats
4725 stats refresh 5s
4726
4727 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4728 section.
4729
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004730
4731stats uri <prefix>
4732 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4733 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4734 yes | no | yes | yes
4735 Arguments :
4736 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4737 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4738 query string.
4739
4740 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4741 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4742 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4743 possible to reach it in the application.
4744
4745 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004746 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004747 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4748 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4749 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4750 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4751
4752 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4753 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4754 an address or a port to statistics only.
4755
4756 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4757 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4758 unobvious parameters.
4759
4760 Example :
4761 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4762 backend public_www
4763 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4764 stats enable
4765 stats hide-version
4766 stats scope .
4767 stats uri /admin?stats
4768 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4769 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4770 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4771
4772 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4773 backend private_monitoring
4774 stats enable
4775 stats uri /admin?stats
4776 stats refresh 5s
4777
4778 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4779
4780
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004781stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4782 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004783 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004784 no | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004785
4786 Arguments :
4787 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4788 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4789 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4790 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4791
4792 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4793 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4794 the "stick-table" statement.
4795
4796 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4797 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4798 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4799 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4800 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4801
4802 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4803 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4804 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4805 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4806 transformation rules.
4807
4808 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4809 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4810 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4811 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4812 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4813 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4814 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4815
4816 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4817 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4818 ACL based conditions.
4819
4820 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4821 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4822 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4823 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4824
4825 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4826 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4827 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4828 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4829
4830 Example :
4831 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4832 # last 30 minutes
4833 backend pop
4834 mode tcp
4835 balance roundrobin
4836 stick store-request src
4837 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4838 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4839 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4840
4841 backend smtp
4842 mode tcp
4843 balance roundrobin
4844 stick match src table pop
4845 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4846 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4847
4848 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4849 extraction.
4850
4851
4852stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4853 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4854 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4855 no | no | yes | yes
4856
4857 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4858 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4859 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4860 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4861
4862 Examples :
4863 # The following form ...
Willy Tarreauec579d82010-02-26 19:15:04 +01004864 stick on src table pop if !localhost
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004865
4866 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4867 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4868 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4869
4870
4871 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4872 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4873 backend http
4874 mode http
4875 balance roundrobin
4876 stick on src table https
4877 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4878 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4879 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4880
4881 backend https
4882 mode tcp
4883 balance roundrobin
4884 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4885 stick on src
4886 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4887 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4888
4889 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4890
4891
4892stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4893 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4894 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4895 no | no | yes | yes
4896
4897 Arguments :
4898 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4899 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4900 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4901 server is selected.
4902
4903 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4904 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4905 the "stick-table" statement.
4906
4907 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4908 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4909 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4910 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4911 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4912 address.
4913
4914 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4915 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4916 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4917 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4918 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4919 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4920 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4921 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4922 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4923 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4924
4925 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4926 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4927 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4928 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4929 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4930 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4931 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4932
4933 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4934 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4935 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4936 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4937
4938 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4939 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4940 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4941 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4942 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4943 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4944 another protocol or access method.
4945
4946 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4947 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4948 the request.
4949
4950 Example :
4951 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4952 # last 30 minutes
4953 backend pop
4954 mode tcp
4955 balance roundrobin
4956 stick store-request src
4957 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4958 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4959 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4960
4961 backend smtp
4962 mode tcp
4963 balance roundrobin
4964 stick match src table pop
4965 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4966 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4967
4968 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4969 extraction.
4970
4971
4972stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4973 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4974 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4975 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4976 no | no | yes | yes
4977
4978 Arguments :
4979 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4980 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4981 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4982 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4983
4984 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4985 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4986 instance.
4987
4988 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4989 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4990 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4991 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4992 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4993 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4994 to 31 characters.
4995
4996 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4997 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4998 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4999 increase.
5000
5001 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005002 value directly impacts memory usage. Count approximately
5003 50 bytes per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size
5004 supports suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01005005
5006 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
5007 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
5008 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
5009 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
5010 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
5011 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
5012 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
5013 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
5014 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
5015 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
5016 parameter (see below).
5017
5018 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
5019 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
5020 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
5021 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
5022 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
5023 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
5024 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
5025 if not expiration delay is specified.
5026
5027 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
5028 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
5029 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
5030 reference it.
5031
5032 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
5033 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
5034 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
5035 as an exclusive stickiness.
5036
5037 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
5038 about time format.
5039
5040
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005041tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
5042 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5043 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5044 no | yes | yes | no
5045
5046 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
5047 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5048 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5049 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5050 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5051 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5052 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5053 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5054
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005055 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005056 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5057
5058 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
5059 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
5060 "reject" statement.
5061
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005062 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005063
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005064 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005065
5066
5067tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
5068 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5069 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5070 no | yes | yes | no
5071
5072 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
5073 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5074 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5075 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5076 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5077 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5078 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5079 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5080
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005081 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005082 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5083
5084 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
5085 "accept".
5086
5087 Example:
5088 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
5089 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5090 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5091 tcp-request reject if content_present
5092
5093 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
5094 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5095 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5096 tcp-request accept if content_present
5097 tcp-request reject
5098
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005099 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005100
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005101 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005102
5103
5104tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
5105 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
5106 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5107 no | yes | yes | no
5108 Arguments :
5109 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5110 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5111 as explained at the top of this document.
5112
5113 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
5114 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
5115 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
5116 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
5117 data for at most the specified amount of time.
5118
5119 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
5120 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005121 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005122 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01005123 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
5124 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
5125 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
5126 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005127
5128 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
5129 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
5130 it pass through unaffected.
5131
5132 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
5133 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
5134 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005135 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005136 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
5137 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
5138 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
5139
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005140 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005141 "timeout client".
5142
5143
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005144timeout check <timeout>
5145 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
5146 established.
5147
5148 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5149 yes | no | yes | yes
5150 Arguments:
5151 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5152 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5153 as explained at the top of this document.
5154
5155 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5156 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5157 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5158 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
Willy Tarreaud7550a22010-02-10 05:10:19 +01005159 (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
5160 timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
5161 avoid that).
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005162
5163 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5164 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5165
5166 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5167 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005168 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005169
5170 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5171 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5172 forget about it.
5173
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005174 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5175 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005176
5177
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005178timeout client <timeout>
5179timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5180 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5181 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5182 yes | yes | yes | no
5183 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005184 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005185 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5186 as explained at the top of this document.
5187
5188 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5189 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5190 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5191 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5192 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5193 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5194 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5195 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005196 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005197 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5198 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5199
5200 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5201 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5202 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5203 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5204 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5205 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5206
5207 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5208 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5209 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5210
5211 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5212
5213
5214timeout connect <timeout>
5215timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5216 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5217 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5218 yes | no | yes | yes
5219 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005220 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005221 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5222 as explained at the top of this document.
5223
5224 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005225 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005226 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005227 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005228 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5229 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005230
5231 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5232 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5233 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5234 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5235 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5236 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5237
5238 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5239 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5240 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5241
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005242 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5243 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005244
5245
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005246timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5247 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5248 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5249 yes | yes | yes | yes
5250 Arguments :
5251 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5252 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5253 as explained at the top of this document.
5254
5255 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5256 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5257 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5258 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5259 once the request has started to present itself.
5260
5261 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5262 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5263 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5264 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5265 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5266
5267 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5268 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5269 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5270 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5271
5272 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5273 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5274 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5275 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5276 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02005277 with tens to hundreds of thousands of clients.
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005278
5279 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5280 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5281 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5282 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5283
5284 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5285
5286
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005287timeout http-request <timeout>
5288 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5289 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005290 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005291 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005292 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005293 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5294 as explained at the top of this document.
5295
5296 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5297 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5298 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5299 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5300 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5301 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5302 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5303 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5304
5305 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5306 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005307 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5308 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005309
5310 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5311 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5312 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5313 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5314 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5315
5316 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005317 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5318 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5319 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005320
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005321 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005322
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005323
5324timeout queue <timeout>
5325 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5326 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5327 yes | no | yes | yes
5328 Arguments :
5329 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5330 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5331 as explained at the top of this document.
5332
5333 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5334 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5335 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5336 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5337 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5338
5339 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5340 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5341 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5342 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5343
5344 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5345
5346
5347timeout server <timeout>
5348timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5349 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5350 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5351 yes | no | yes | yes
5352 Arguments :
5353 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5354 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5355 as explained at the top of this document.
5356
5357 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5358 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5359 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5360 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5361 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5362 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5363 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5364
5365 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5366 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5367 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5368 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5369 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005370 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005371 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005372 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005373
5374 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5375 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5376 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5377 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5378 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5379 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5380
5381 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5382 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5383 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5384
5385 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5386
5387
5388timeout tarpit <timeout>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005389 Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005390 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5391 yes | yes | yes | yes
5392 Arguments :
5393 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5394 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5395 as explained at the top of this document.
5396
5397 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5398 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5399 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5400
5401 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5402 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5403 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5404 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005405 with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005406
5407 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5408
5409
5410transparent (deprecated)
5411 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5412 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005413 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005414 Arguments : none
5415
5416 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5417 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5418 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5419 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5420 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5421 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5422 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5423 appropriate server.
5424
5425 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5426
5427 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5428 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5429
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005430 See also: "option transparent"
5431
5432
5433use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5434use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005435 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005436 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5437 no | yes | yes | no
5438 Arguments :
5439 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5440
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005441 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005442
5443 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5444 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5445 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005446 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5447 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5448 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5449 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005450
5451 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5452 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5453 assign the backend.
5454
5455 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5456 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5457 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5458 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5459 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5460 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5461
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005462 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005463 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005464 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5465 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5466 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5467
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005468 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005469
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005470
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010054715. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005472------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005473
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005474The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5475which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5476arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5477settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5478after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5479Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5480address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005481
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005482 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005483 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005484
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005485The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005486
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005487addr <ipv4>
5488 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5489 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5490 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5491 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5492 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005493
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005494 Supported in default-server: No
5495
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005496backup
5497 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5498 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5499 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5500 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5501 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5502 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005503
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005504 Supported in default-server: No
5505
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005506check
5507 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5508 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5509 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5510 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5511 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5512 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5513 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5514 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5515 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005516 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5517 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005518
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005519 Supported in default-server: No
5520
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005521cookie <value>
5522 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5523 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5524 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5525 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5526 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5527 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5528 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5529
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005530 Supported in default-server: No
5531
Willy Tarreau96839092010-03-29 10:02:24 +02005532disabled
5533 The "disabled" keyword starts the server in the "disabled" state. That means
5534 that it is marked down in maintenance mode, and no connection other than the
5535 ones allowed by persist mode will reach it. It is very well suited to setup
5536 new servers, because normal traffic will never reach them, while it is still
5537 possible to test the service by making use of the force-persist mechanism.
5538
5539 Supported in default-server: No
5540
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005541error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005542 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5543 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5544 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005545
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005546 Supported in default-server: Yes
5547
5548 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005549
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005550fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005551 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5552 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5553 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5554
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005555 Supported in default-server: Yes
5556
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005557id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005558 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5559 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5560 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005561
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005562 Supported in default-server: No
5563
5564inter <delay>
5565fastinter <delay>
5566downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005567 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5568 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5569 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5570 between checks depending on the server state :
5571
5572 Server state | Interval used
5573 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5574 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5575 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5576 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5577 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5578 or yet unchecked. |
5579 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5580 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5581 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005582
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005583 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5584 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5585 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5586 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5587 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5588 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5589 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5590 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5591 servers.
5592
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005593 Supported in default-server: Yes
5594
5595maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005596 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5597 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5598 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5599 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5600 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5601 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5602 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5603 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5604
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005605 Supported in default-server: Yes
5606
5607maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005608 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5609 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5610 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5611 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5612 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5613 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5614 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5615
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005616 Supported in default-server: Yes
5617
5618minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005619 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5620 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5621 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5622 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5623 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5624 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005625 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005626 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005627
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005628 Supported in default-server: Yes
5629
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005630observe <mode>
5631 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5632 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5633 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5634 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5635 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5636 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5637 headers, a timeout, etc.
5638
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005639 Supported in default-server: No
5640
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005641 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5642
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005643on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005644 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5645 Currently, four modes are available:
5646 - fastinter: force fastinter
5647 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5648 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5649 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5650 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5651
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005652 Supported in default-server: Yes
5653
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005654 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5655
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005656port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005657 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5658 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5659 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5660 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5661 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5662 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5663
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005664 Supported in default-server: Yes
5665
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005666redir <prefix>
5667 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5668 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5669 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5670 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5671 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5672 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5673 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5674 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005675 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005676 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5677 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5678 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5679 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5680 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5681
5682 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5683
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005684 Supported in default-server: No
5685
5686rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005687 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5688 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5689 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5690
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005691 Supported in default-server: Yes
5692
5693slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005694 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5695 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5696 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5697 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5698 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5699 parameters :
5700
5701 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5702 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5703
5704 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5705 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5706 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5707 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5708
5709 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5710 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5711 seen as failed.
5712
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005713 Supported in default-server: Yes
5714
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005715source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02005716source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005717source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005718 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5719 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5720 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5721 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5722
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005723 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5724 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5725 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5726 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5727 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5728 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5729 server.
5730
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005731 Supported in default-server: No
5732
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005733track [<proxy>/]<server>
5734 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5735 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5736 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5737 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5738 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5739
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005740 Supported in default-server: No
5741
5742weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005743 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5744 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5745 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005746 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5747 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5748 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5749 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5750 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5751 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005752
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005753 Supported in default-server: Yes
5754
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005755
57566. HTTP header manipulation
5757---------------------------
5758
5759In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5760response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5761request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5762which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5763against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5764to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5765passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5766headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5767never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5768
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005769There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5770(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5771rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5772messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5773in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005774happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005775add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5776normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5777
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005778This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5779in section 4.2 :
5780
5781 - reqadd <string>
5782 - reqallow <search>
5783 - reqiallow <search>
5784 - reqdel <search>
5785 - reqidel <search>
5786 - reqdeny <search>
5787 - reqideny <search>
5788 - reqpass <search>
5789 - reqipass <search>
5790 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5791 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5792 - reqtarpit <search>
5793 - reqitarpit <search>
5794 - rspadd <string>
5795 - rspdel <search>
5796 - rspidel <search>
5797 - rspdeny <search>
5798 - rspideny <search>
5799 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5800 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5801
5802With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5803is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5804parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5805prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5806Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5807
5808 \t for a tab
5809 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5810 \n for a new line (LF)
5811 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5812 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5813 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5814 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5815 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5816
5817The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5818portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5819above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5820regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
58219 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5822is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5823
5824The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5825after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5826
5827Notes related to these keywords :
5828---------------------------------
5829 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5830 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5831 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5832
5833 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5834 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5835 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5836
5837 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5838 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5839 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5840 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5841 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5842
5843 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5844 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5845 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5846 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5847 useless headers before adding new ones.
5848
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005849 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005850 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5851
5852 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5853 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5854 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5855
5856 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5857 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005858 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005859
5860
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010058617. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5862------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005863
5864The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5865content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5866from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5867simple :
5868
5869 - define test criteria with sets of values
5870 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5871
5872The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5873
5874In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5875
5876 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5877
5878This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5879Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5880and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5881an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5882of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5883
5884ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5885'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5886which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5887
5888There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5889performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5890
5891The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5892
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005893 -i : ignore case during matching of all subsequent patterns.
5894 -f : load patterns from a file.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005895 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5896
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005897The "-f" flag is special as it loads all of the lines it finds in the file
5898specified in argument and loads all of them before continuing. It is even
5899possible to pass multiple "-f" arguments if the patterns are to be loaded from
Willy Tarreau58215a02010-05-13 22:07:43 +02005900multiple files. Empty lines as well as lines beginning with a sharp ('#') will
5901be ignored. All leading spaces and tabs will be stripped. If it is absolutely
5902needed to insert a valid pattern beginning with a sharp, just prefix it with a
5903space so that it is not taken for a comment. Depending on the data type and
5904match method, haproxy may load the lines into a binary tree, allowing very fast
5905lookups. This is true for IPv4 and exact string matching. In this case,
5906duplicates will automatically be removed. Also, note that the "-i" flag applies
5907to subsequent entries and not to entries loaded from files preceeding it. For
5908instance :
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005909
5910 acl valid-ua hdr(user-agent) -f exact-ua.lst -i -f generic-ua.lst test
5911
5912In this example, each line of "exact-ua.lst" will be exactly matched against
5913the "user-agent" header of the request. Then each line of "generic-ua" will be
5914case-insensitively matched. Then the word "test" will be insensitively matched
5915too.
5916
5917Note that right now it is difficult for the ACL parsers to report errors, so if
5918a file is unreadable or unparsable, the most you'll get is a parse error in the
5919ACL. Thus, file-based ACLs should only be produced by reliable processes.
5920
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005921Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005922
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005923 - integers or integer ranges
5924 - strings
5925 - regular expressions
5926 - IP addresses and networks
5927
5928
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059297.1. Matching integers
5930----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005931
5932Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5933that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5934expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5935may be omitted.
5936
5937For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5938unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5939representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5940
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005941As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5942two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5943instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5944ranges and operators.
5945
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005946For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005947operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5948Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5949of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005950
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005951Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005952
5953 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5954 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5955 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5956 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5957 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5958
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005959For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005960
5961 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5962
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005963This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5964
5965 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5966
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005967
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059687.2. Matching strings
5969---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005970
5971String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5972exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5973characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5974string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5975to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005976before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005977
5978
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059797.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5980-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005981
5982Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5983they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5984possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5985passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5986the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005987the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5988match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005989
5990
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059917.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5992----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005993
5994IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5995netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5996within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005997host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005998difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5999at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
6000does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
6001parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006002
6003
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060047.5. Available matching criteria
6005--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006006
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060077.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
6008------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006009
6010A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
6011analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
6012addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
6013
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006014always_false
6015 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
6016 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
6017
6018always_true
6019 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
6020 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
6021
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006022avg_queue <integer>
6023avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
6024 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
6025 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
6026 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
6027 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
6028 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
6029 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
6030 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
6031 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
6032 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
6033 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
6034 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01006035
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006036be_conn <integer>
6037be_conn(frontend) <integer>
6038 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
6039 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
6040 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6041 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
6042 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006043
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006044be_sess_rate <integer>
6045be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
6046 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
6047 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
6048 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
6049 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
6050 sucking of an online dictionary).
6051
6052 Example :
6053 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
6054 backend dynamic
6055 mode http
6056 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
6057 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006058
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006059connslots <integer>
6060connslots(backend) <integer>
6061 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006062 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006063 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
6064
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006065 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
6066 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006067
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006068 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006069 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
6070 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
6071 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
6072 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
6073 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006074 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006075
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006076 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
6077 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
6078 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
6079 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006080
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006081dst <ip_address>
6082 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
6083 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006084
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006085dst_conn <integer>
6086 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
6087 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
6088 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
6089 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
6090 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
6091 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
6092
6093dst_port <integer>
6094 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
6095 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
6096
6097fe_conn <integer>
6098fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
6099 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
6100 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
6101 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6102 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
6103 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
6104 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
6105 criteria.
6106
6107fe_id <integer>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01006108 Applies to the frontend's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006109 frontend it was called.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006110
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006111fe_sess_rate <integer>
6112fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
6113 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
6114 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
6115 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
6116 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
6117 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
6118 the rate to go down below the limit.
6119
6120 Example :
6121 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
6122 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
6123 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
6124 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
6125 frontend mail
6126 bind :25
6127 mode tcp
6128 maxconn 100
6129 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
6130 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
6131 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
6132 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006133
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006134nbsrv <integer>
6135nbsrv(backend) <integer>
6136 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
6137 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
6138 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
6139 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
6140 "monitor fail".
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006141
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006142queue <integer>
6143queue(frontend) <integer>
6144 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
6145 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
6146 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
6147 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
6148 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
6149 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
6150 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
6151
6152so_id <integer>
6153 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
6154
6155src <ip_address>
6156 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
6157 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
6158 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
6159
6160src_port <integer>
6161 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006162
Willy Tarreau0b1cd942010-05-16 22:18:27 +02006163srv_is_up(<server>)
6164srv_is_up(<backend>/<server>)
6165 Returns true when the designated server is UP, and false when it is either
6166 DOWN or in maintenance mode. If <backend> is omitted, then the server is
6167 looked up in the current backend. The function takes no arguments since it
6168 is used as a boolean. It is mainly used to take action based on an external
6169 status reported via a health check (eg: a geographical site's availability).
6170 Another possible use which is more of a hack consists in using dummy servers
6171 as boolean variables that can be enabled or disabled from the CLI, so that
6172 rules depending on those ACLs can be tweaked in realtime.
6173
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006174
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061757.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
6176-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006177
6178A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
6179during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
6180through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
6181for more detailed information on the subject.
6182
6183req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006184 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006185 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
6186 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
6187 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
6188 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
6189 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
6190 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
6191
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006192req_proto_http
6193 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
6194 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006195 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006196 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
6197 using TCP request content inspection rules.
6198
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006199req_rdp_cookie <string>
6200req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
6201 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
6202 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6203 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6204 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6205 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6206 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6207 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6208 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6209
6210req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6211req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6212 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6213 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6214 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6215 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6216 cookies.
6217
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006218req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6219 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6220 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6221 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6222 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6223 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6224 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6225 with TCP request content inspection.
6226
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006227wait_end
6228 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6229 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6230 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6231 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6232 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6233 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6234 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6235 inspection.
6236
6237 Examples :
6238 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6239 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6240 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6241
6242 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6243 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6244 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6245 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6246 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6247 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6248 tcp-request content reject
6249
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006250
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062517.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6252--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006253
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006254A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006255application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6256read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6257than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6258
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006259hdr <string>
6260hdr(header) <string>
6261 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6262 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
6263 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6264 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
6265 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6266
6267 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
6268 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
6269 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6270
6271 hdr(Connection) -i close
6272
6273hdr_beg <string>
6274hdr_beg(header) <string>
6275 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
6276 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6277 response headers sent by the server.
6278
6279hdr_cnt <integer>
6280hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6281 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6282 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6283 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6284 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
6285 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
6286 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6287 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6288
6289hdr_dir <string>
6290hdr_dir(header) <string>
6291 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6292 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6293 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
6294 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6295 headers sent by the server.
6296
6297hdr_dom <string>
6298hdr_dom(header) <string>
6299 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6300 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6301 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
6302 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6303 server.
6304
6305hdr_end <string>
6306hdr_end(header) <string>
6307 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
6308 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6309 response headers sent by the server.
6310
6311hdr_ip <ip_address>
6312hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6313 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6314 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
6315 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6316 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6317
6318hdr_reg <regex>
6319hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6320 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6321 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6322 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
6323 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6324 response headers sent by the server.
6325
6326hdr_sub <string>
6327hdr_sub(header) <string>
6328 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
6329 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6330 response headers sent by the server.
6331
6332hdr_val <integer>
6333hdr_val(header) <integer>
6334 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6335 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6336 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
6337 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6338
6339http_auth(userlist)
6340http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6341 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6342 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6343 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6344 of specified groups.
6345
6346 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6347
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006348method <string>
6349 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6350 already check for most common methods.
6351
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006352path <string>
6353 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6354 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6355 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6356
6357path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006358 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6359 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006360
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006361path_dir <string>
6362 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6363 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6364 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6365 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6366
6367path_dom <string>
6368 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6369 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6370 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6371
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006372path_end <string>
6373 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6374 control file name extension.
6375
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006376path_reg <regex>
6377 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6378 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6379 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6380
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006381path_sub <string>
6382 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6383 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6384 "path_dir".
6385
6386req_ver <string>
6387 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6388 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6389
6390status <integer>
6391 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6392 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6393 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6394
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006395url <string>
6396 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6397 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6398
6399url_beg <string>
6400 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6401 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6402
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006403url_dir <string>
6404 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6405 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6406 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6407 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6408
6409url_dom <string>
6410 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6411 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6412 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6413
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006414url_end <string>
6415 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6416 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006417
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006418url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006419 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6420 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006421 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006422
6423url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006424 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6425 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006426 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006427 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006428
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006429url_reg <regex>
6430 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6431 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6432 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006433
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006434url_sub <string>
6435 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6436 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006437
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006438
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064397.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6440---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006441
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006442Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6443every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02006444order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006445
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006446ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6447---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006448FALSE always_false never match
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006449HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006450HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6451HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006452HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
6453HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
6454HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
6455HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6456LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006457METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6458METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6459METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6460METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6461METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6462METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006463RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006464REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006465TRUE always_true always match
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006466WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6467---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006468
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006469
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064707.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6471----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006472
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006473Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6474combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006475
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006476 - AND (implicit)
6477 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6478 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006479
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006480A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006481
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006482 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006483
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006484Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6485indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006486
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006487For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6488"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6489requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6490is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006491
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006492 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6493 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6494 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6495 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006496
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006497To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6498and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006499
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006500 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6501 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6502 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6503 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006504
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006505 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6506 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6507 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6508 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006509
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006510It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6511expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6512be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6513the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6514
6515 The following rule :
6516
6517 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6518 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6519
6520 Can also be written that way :
6521
6522 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6523
6524It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6525to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6526simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6527sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6528good use is the following :
6529
6530 With named ACLs :
6531
6532 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6533 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6534 monitor fail if site_dead
6535
6536 With anonymous ACLs :
6537
6538 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6539
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006540See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006541
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006542
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010065437.8. Pattern extraction
6544-----------------------
6545
6546The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6547response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6548for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6549
6550All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6551"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6552begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6553arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6554much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6555equivalent used in ACLs.
6556
6557The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6558
6559 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6560 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6561
6562 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6563 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6564 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6565 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6566
6567 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6568 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6569 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6570 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6571 type integer and only works with such tables.
6572
Willy Tarreau4a568972010-05-12 08:08:50 +02006573 hdr(name) This extracts the last occurrence of header <name> in an HTTP
6574 request and converts it to an IP address. This IP address is
6575 then used to match the table. A typical use is with the
6576 x-forwarded-for header.
6577
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006578
6579The currently available list of transformations include :
6580
6581 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6582 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6583 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6584
6585 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6586 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6587 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6588
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006589 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6590 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6591 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6592 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6593 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6594
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006595
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065968. Logging
6597----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006598
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006599One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6600provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6601very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6602provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6603state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006604to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006605headers.
6606
6607In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6608about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6609send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6610
6611 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6612 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6613 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6614 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6615 at the termination.
6616
6617The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6618allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6619as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6620while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6621real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6622delay.
6623
6624
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066258.1. Log levels
6626---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006627
6628TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6629source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6630HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6631in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6632particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006633syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006634facilities.
6635
6636
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066378.2. Log formats
6638----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006639
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006640HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006641and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6642the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6643formats are the following ones :
6644
6645 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6646 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6647 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6648 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6649 extents.
6650
6651 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6652 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6653 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6654 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6655 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6656
6657 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6658 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6659 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6660 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6661 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6662
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006663 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6664 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6665 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6666 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6667
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006668Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6669specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6670field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6671servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6672always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6673identifier.
6674
6675Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6676 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6677 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6678 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6679 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6680
6681
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066828.2.1. Default log format
6683-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006684
6685This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6686as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6687format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6688
6689 Example :
6690 listen www
6691 mode http
6692 log global
6693 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6694
6695 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6696 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6697 (www/HTTP)
6698
6699 Field Format Extract from the example above
6700 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6701 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6702 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6703 4 'to' to
6704 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6705 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6706
6707Detailed fields description :
6708 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6709 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6710 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6711 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6712 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6713 and processed the connection.
6714 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6715
6716It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6717will eventually disappear.
6718
6719
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067208.2.2. TCP log format
6721---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006722
6723The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6724is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6725information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6726counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6727emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6728environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6729the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6730sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006731specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6732not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6733fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6734marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006735
6736 Example :
6737 frontend fnt
6738 mode tcp
6739 option tcplog
6740 log global
6741 default_backend bck
6742
6743 backend bck
6744 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6745
6746 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6747 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6748 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6749
6750 Field Format Extract from the example above
6751 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6752 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6753 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6754 4 frontend_name fnt
6755 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6756 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6757 7 bytes_read* 212
6758 8 termination_state --
6759 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6760 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6761
6762Detailed fields description :
6763 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6764 connection to haproxy.
6765
6766 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6767
6768 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6769 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6770 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6771 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6772
6773 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6774 and processed the connection.
6775
6776 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6777 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6778 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6779 applications.
6780
6781 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6782 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6783 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6784 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6785 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6786
6787 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6788 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6789 See "Timers" below for more details.
6790
6791 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6792 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6793 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6794 "Timers" below for more details.
6795
6796 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6797 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6798 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6799 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6800 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6801 details.
6802
6803 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6804 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6805 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6806 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6807 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6808
6809 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6810 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6811 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6812 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6813 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6814 for more details.
6815
6816 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6817 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6818 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6819 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6820 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006821 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006822
6823 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6824 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6825 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6826 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6827 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6828 caused by a denial of service attack.
6829
6830 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6831 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6832 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6833 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6834 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6835 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6836 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6837 denial of service attack.
6838
6839 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6840 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6841 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6842 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6843 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6844 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6845 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6846 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6847 be processed than on other servers.
6848
6849 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6850 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6851 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6852 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6853 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6854 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6855 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6856 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6857 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6858 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6859 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6860 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6861 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6862
6863 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6864 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6865 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6866 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6867 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6868 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6869 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6870 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6871
6872 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6873 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6874 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6875 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6876 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6877 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6878 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6879 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6880 occurs.
6881
6882
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068838.2.3. HTTP log format
6884----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006885
6886The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6887is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6888the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6889are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6890emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6891generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6892"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6893which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006894frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6895is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006896
6897Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6898slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6899with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6900
6901 Example :
6902 frontend http-in
6903 mode http
6904 option httplog
6905 log global
6906 default_backend bck
6907
6908 backend static
6909 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6910
6911 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6912 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6913 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006914 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006915
6916 Field Format Extract from the example above
6917 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6918 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6919 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6920 4 frontend_name http-in
6921 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6922 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6923 7 status_code 200
6924 8 bytes_read* 2750
6925 9 captured_request_cookie -
6926 10 captured_response_cookie -
6927 11 termination_state ----
6928 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6929 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6930 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6931 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6932 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006933
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006934
6935Detailed fields description :
6936 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6937 connection to haproxy.
6938
6939 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6940
6941 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6942 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6943 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6944 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6945 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6946
6947 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6948 and processed the connection.
6949
6950 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6951 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6952 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6953
6954 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6955 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6956 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6957 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6958 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6959 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6960
6961 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6962 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6963 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6964 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6965 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6966 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6967
6968 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6969 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6970 See "Timers" below for more details.
6971
6972 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6973 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6974 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6975 below for more details.
6976
6977 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6978 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6979 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6980 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6981 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6982 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6983 for more details.
6984
6985 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6986 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6987 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6988 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6989 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6990 details.
6991
6992 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6993 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6994 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6995
6996 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6997 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6998 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6999 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
7000 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
7001 overflowing.
7002
7003 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
7004 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
7005 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
7006 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
7007 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
7008 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
7009 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
7010 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
7011
7012 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
7013 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
7014 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
7015 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
7016 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
7017 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
7018 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
7019 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
7020
7021 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
7022 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
7023 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
7024 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
7025 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
7026 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
7027 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
7028
7029 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
7030 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
7031 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
7032 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
7033 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007034 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007035 system.
7036
7037 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
7038 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
7039 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
7040 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
7041 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
7042 caused by a denial of service attack.
7043
7044 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
7045 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
7046 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
7047 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
7048 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
7049 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
7050 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
7051 denial of service attack.
7052
7053 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
7054 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
7055 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
7056 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
7057 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
7058 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
7059 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
7060 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
7061 processed than on other servers.
7062
7063 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
7064 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
7065 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
7066 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
7067 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
7068 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
7069 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
7070 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
7071 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
7072 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
7073 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
7074 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
7075 should not be attributed to the logged server.
7076
7077 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7078 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
7079 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
7080 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
7081 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
7082 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
7083 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
7084 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
7085
7086 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7087 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
7088 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
7089 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
7090 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
7091 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
7092 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
7093 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
7094 occurs.
7095
7096 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
7097 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
7098 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
7099 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
7100 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
7101 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
7102 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
7103 cookies" below for more details.
7104
7105 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
7106 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
7107 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
7108 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
7109 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
7110 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
7111 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
7112 and cookies" below for more details.
7113
7114 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
7115 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
7116 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
7117 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
7118 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
7119 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
7120 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
7121 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
7122
7123
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071248.3. Advanced logging options
7125-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007126
7127Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
7128just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
7129options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
7130for more information about their usage.
7131
7132
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071338.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
7134------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007135
7136It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
7137haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
7138commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
7139monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
7140ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
7141
7142 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
7143 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
7144 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
7145 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
7146
7147 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
7148 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
7149 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
7150 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
7151 such as other load-balancers.
7152
7153 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
7154 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
7155 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
7156
7157
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071588.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
7159----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007160
7161The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
7162what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
7163or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
7164"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
7165just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
7166log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
7167after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
7168is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
7169with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
7170with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
7171
7172
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071738.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
7174------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007175
7176Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
7177for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
7178"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
7179retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
7180raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
7181a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
7182file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
7183you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
7184"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
7185
7186
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071878.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
7188--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007189
7190Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
7191multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
7192them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
7193"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
7194logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
7195error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
7196and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
7197too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
7198useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
7199alternative.
7200
7201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072028.4. Timing events
7203------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007204
7205Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
7206reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7207the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7208frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7209mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7210
7211 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7212 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7213 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7214 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7215 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7216
7217 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7218 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7219 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7220 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7221 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7222
7223 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7224 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7225 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7226 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7227 connection never established.
7228
7229 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7230 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7231 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7232 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7233 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7234 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7235 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7236 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7237 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7238 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7239 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7240
7241 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7242 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7243 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7244 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7245 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7246
7247 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7248
7249 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7250 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7251 negative.
7252
7253These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7254protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7255that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007256due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007257close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7258session has been aborted on timeout.
7259
7260Most common cases :
7261
7262 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7263 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7264 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7265 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7266 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7267 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7268 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7269 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7270 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7271 connections have been accepted at once.
7272
7273 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7274 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7275 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7276 of ms on remote networks.
7277
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007278 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7279 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7280 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007281
7282 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7283 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7284 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7285 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7286 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7287 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7288 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7289 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7290 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7291 to the server until another one is released.
7292
7293Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7294
7295 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7296 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7297 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7298
7299 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7300 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7301 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7302
7303 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7304 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7305 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7306 flags.
7307
7308 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7309 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7310 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7311 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7312 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7313 the client connection was maintained open.
7314
7315 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7316 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7317 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7318 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7319
7320
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073218.5. Session state at disconnection
7322-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007323
7324TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7325"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
73262-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7327each of which has a special meaning :
7328
7329 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7330 session to terminate :
7331
7332 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7333
7334 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7335 server explicitly refused it.
7336
7337 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7338 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7339 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7340 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7341 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7342 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7343
7344 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7345 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7346 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7347 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7348 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7349
7350 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7351 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7352 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7353 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7354 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7355
7356 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7357 send or receive data.
7358
7359 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7360 send or receive data.
7361
7362 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7363 with nothing left in the buffers.
7364
7365 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7366
7367 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7368 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7369
7370 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7371 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7372 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7373 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7374 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7375
7376 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7377 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7378
7379 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7380 server (HTTP only).
7381
7382 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7383
7384 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7385 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7386 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7387
7388 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7389 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7390 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7391
7392 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7393
7394 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7395 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7396
7397 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7398 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7399 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7400
7401 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7402 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02007403 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, persistence conditionally
7404 ignored, or an attack.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007405
7406 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7407 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7408 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7409 another server.
7410
7411 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7412 server.
7413
7414 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7415
7416 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7417 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7418
7419 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7420
7421 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7422 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7423 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7424
7425 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7426
7427 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7428 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7429
7430 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7431
7432 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7433
7434The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7435happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7436helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7437starvation, attacks, etc...
7438
7439The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7440alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7441easier finding and understanding.
7442
7443 Flags Reason
7444
7445 -- Normal termination.
7446
7447 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7448 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7449 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7450 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7451
7452 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7453 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7454 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7455 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7456 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7457 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007458
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007459 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7460 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7461 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7462
7463 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7464 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7465 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7466
7467 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7468 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7469 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7470 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7471 the server takes too long to respond.
7472
7473 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7474 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7475 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7476 long a time to respond.
7477
7478 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7479 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7480 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7481 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7482 and the client.
7483
7484 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7485 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7486 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7487 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7488 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7489 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7490
7491 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7492 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007493 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7494 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7495 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7496 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007497
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007498 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007499 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7500 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7501 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7502 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7503 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7504
7505 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7506 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7507 503 or 504 here.
7508
7509 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7510 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7511 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7512 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7513 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7514
7515 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7516 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007517 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007518 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7519 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7520
7521 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7522 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7523 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7524 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7525 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7526 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7527 between haproxy and the server.
7528
7529 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7530 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7531 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7532 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7533 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7534 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7535 solution is to fix the application.
7536
7537 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7538 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7539 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7540 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7541 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7542 external attacks.
7543
7544 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7545 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7546 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7547 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7548 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7549
7550 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7551 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7552 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7553 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7554 containing unauthorized characters.
7555
7556 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7557 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7558 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7559 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7560
7561 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7562 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7563 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7564 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7565
7566 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7567 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7568 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7569 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7570
7571
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075728.6. Non-printable characters
7573-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007574
7575In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7576consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7577converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7578prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7579being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7580escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7581is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7582'}' when logging headers.
7583
7584Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7585issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7586containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7587
7588Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7589the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7590performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7591
7592
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075938.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7594---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007595
7596Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7597achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007598section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007599cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7600the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7601the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007602locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007603not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7604user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7605a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7606wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7607
7608 Examples :
7609 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7610 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7611
7612 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7613 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7614
7615
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076168.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7617---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007618
7619Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7620proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7621the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7622server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7623
7624Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7625response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007626section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007627
7628It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007629time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7630appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007631are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7632and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7633follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7634request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7635in the logs.
7636
7637 Example :
7638 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7639 listen proxy-out
7640 mode http
7641 option httplog
7642 option logasap
7643 log global
7644 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7645
7646 # log the name of the virtual server
7647 capture request header Host len 20
7648
7649 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7650 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7651
7652 # log the beginning of the referrer
7653 capture request header Referer len 20
7654
7655 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7656 capture response header Server len 20
7657
7658 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7659 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7660
7661 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7662 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7663
7664 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7665 capture response header Via len 20
7666
7667 # log the URL location during a redirection
7668 capture response header Location len 20
7669
7670 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7671 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7672 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7673 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7674 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7675
7676 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7677 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7678 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7679 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007680 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007681
7682 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7683 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7684 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7685 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7686 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007687 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007688
7689
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076908.9. Examples of logs
7691---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007692
7693These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7694them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7695reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7696
7697 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7698 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7699 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7700
7701 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7702 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7703
7704 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7705 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7706 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7707
7708 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7709 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7710
7711 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7712 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7713 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7714
7715 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007716 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007717 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7718 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7719
7720 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7721 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7722 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7723
7724 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7725 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7726 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7727 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7728 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7729 to return the 502 and not the server.
7730
7731 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007732 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007733
7734 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7735 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7736 Nothing was sent to any server.
7737
7738 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7739 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7740
7741 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7742 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7743 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7744 send a 408 return code to the client.
7745
7746 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7747 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7748
7749 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7750 5 seconds ("c----").
7751
7752 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7753 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007754 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007755
7756 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007757 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007758 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7759 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7760 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7761 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7762 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007763
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007764
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020077659. Statistics and monitoring
7766----------------------------
7767
7768It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7769mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7770CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7771Unix socket.
7772
7773
77749.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007775---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007776
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007777The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7778page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7779
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007780 0. pxname: proxy name
7781 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7782 for server)
7783 2. qcur: current queued requests
7784 3. qmax: max queued requests
7785 4. scur: current sessions
7786 5. smax: max sessions
7787 6. slim: sessions limit
7788 7. stot: total sessions
7789 8. bin: bytes in
7790 9. bout: bytes out
7791 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007792 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007793 12. ereq: request errors
7794 13. econ: connection errors
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007795 14. eresp: response errors (among which srv_abrt)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007796 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7797 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007798 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007799 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7800 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7801 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7802 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7803 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7804 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7805 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7806 25. qlimit: queue limit
7807 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7808 27. iid: unique proxy id
7809 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7810 29. throttle: warm up status
7811 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7812 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007813 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007814 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7815 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7816 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007817 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007818 UNK -> unknown
7819 INI -> initializing
7820 SOCKERR -> socket error
7821 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7822 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7823 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7824 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7825 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7826 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7827 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7828 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7829 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7830 disable-on-404
7831 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7832 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7833 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007834 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7835 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007836 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7837 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7838 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7839 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7840 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7841 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007842 45. hanafail: failed health checks details
7843 46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
7844 47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
7845 48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007846 49. cli_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the client
7847 50. srv_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the server (inc. in eresp)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007848
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007849
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020078509.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007851-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007852
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007853The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007854must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7855is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7856a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7857risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7858followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7859given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7860then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7861to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007862
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007863It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7864on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7865own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007866
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007867clear counters
7868 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7869 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7870 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
7871 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7872 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7873
7874clear counters all
7875 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
7876 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7877 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7878
7879disable server <backend>/<server>
7880 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7881 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7882 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7883 during the maintenance.
7884
7885 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
7886 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
7887
7888 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7889 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7890
7891 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7892 level "admin".
7893
7894enable server <backend>/<server>
7895 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7896 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7897
7898 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7899 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7900
7901 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7902 level "admin".
7903
7904get weight <backend>/<server>
7905 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7906 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7907 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
7908 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7909 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7910 dash ('#').
7911
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007912help
7913 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7914 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007915
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007916prompt
7917 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7918 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7919 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7920 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7921 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7922 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7923 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7924 command.
7925
7926quit
7927 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007928
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007929set timeout cli <delay>
7930 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7931 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7932 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7933
7934set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7935 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7936 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7937 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7938 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7939 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7940 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7941 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7942 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7943 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7944 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7945 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
7946 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7947 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7948 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7949
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007950show errors [<iid>]
7951 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7952 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007953 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7954 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7955 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007956
7957 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7958 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7959 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7960 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7961 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7962 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7963 are reported too.
7964
7965 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7966 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7967 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7968 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7969 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7970 code.
7971
7972 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7973 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7974 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7975 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7976 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7977 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7978 line.
7979
7980 Example :
7981 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7982 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7983 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7984 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7985
7986 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7987 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7988 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7989 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7990 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7991 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7992 00204+ minal\r\n
7993 00211 \r\n
7994
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007995 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007996 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7997 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7998 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7999 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
8000 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
8001 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01008002
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008003show info
8004 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
8005
8006show sess
8007 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02008008 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
8009 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
8010
Willy Tarreau66dc20a2010-03-05 17:53:32 +01008011show sess <id>
8012 Display a lot of internal information about the specified session identifier.
8013 This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
8014 of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). Those information are
8015 useless to most users but may be used by haproxy developers to troubleshoot a
8016 complex bug. The output format is intentionally not documented so that it can
8017 freely evolve depending on demands.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008018
8019show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
8020 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
8021 possible to dump only selected items :
8022 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
8023 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
8024 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
8025 for example:
8026 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
8027 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
8028 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
8029
8030 Example :
8031 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
8032 Name: HAProxy
8033 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
8034 Release_date: 2009/09/23
8035 Nbproc: 1
8036 Process_num: 1
8037 (...)
8038
8039 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
8040 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
8041 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
8042 (...)
8043 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
8044
8045 $
8046
8047 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
8048 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
8049 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
8050 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01008051 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008052
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02008053
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01008054/*
8055 * Local variables:
8056 * fill-column: 79
8057 * End:
8058 */